GM Owner Manuals

GM Owner Manuals
2006 Pontiac Wave Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-7
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-12
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-29
Airbag System
......................................... 1-56
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-69
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-7
Windows ................................................. 2-12
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-14
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-17
Mirrors .................................................... 2-32
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-34
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-35
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-18
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-23
Secondary Information Center (SIC) ............ 3-31
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-39
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-33
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-41
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-41
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-46
Tires
...................................................... 5-47
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-70
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-79
Electrical System ...................................... 5-80
Capacities and Specifications
..................... 5-87
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ...... 5-88
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-13
Index .................................................................1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, PONTIAC,
and the PONTIAC Emblem are registered trademarks;
and the name WAVE is a trademark of General
Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Pontiac Motor Division whenever
it appears in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it is
needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle is
sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 06WAVE A First Printing
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this
is done, it can help you learn about the features
and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
together in the owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is
an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and
the page number where it can be found.
©
2005 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
{CAUTION:
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce
the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the
damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle.
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Seats ................................................1-2
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ..............................1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-3
Head Restraints .............................................1-6
Rear Seats .......................................................1-7
Rear Seat Operation (Sedan) ...........................1-7
Rear Seat Operation (Hatchback) .....................1-9
Safety Belts ...................................................1-12
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-12
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-16
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-17
Driver Position ..............................................1-17
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment .....................1-23
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-24
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-24
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-24
Center Rear Passenger Position .....................1-28
Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-28
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-28
Child Restraints .............................................1-29
Older Children ..............................................1-29
Infants and Young Children ............................1-32
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-35
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-40
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) ..................................................1-42
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position ...................................................1-49
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ............................................1-51
Airbag System ...............................................1-56
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-58
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-60
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-62
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-62
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-62
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-64
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-68
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-68
Restraint System Check ..................................1-69
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-69
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-70
1-1
Front Seats
Pull up and hold the bar
located under the front of
the seat to unlock it.
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
1-2
Slide the seat to where you want it and release the bar.
Then try to move the seat with your body, to make
sure the seat is locked into place.
Driver Seat Height Adjuster
To adjust the height of the
driver’s seat cushion,
turn the knob located on
the outboard side of
the seat cushion.
Turn the knob forward to raise the height of the seat
cushion and rearward to lower it.
Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
Your seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side
of the seats.
1-3
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
{CAUTION:
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
1-4
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.
1-5
Head Restraints
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chances of a neck injury in a crash.
Pull the head restraint up to raise it.
1-6
Push the release button in and press down on the head
restraint to lower it.
To remove the head restraint, pull it all the way up.
Then push the release button in and lift the head
restraint from the guide sleeve.
Replace the head restraint and reset it in the original
position before driving.
The front seat head restraints also tilt forward. To tilt the
head restraint, first put it in the upright position by tilting it
forward fully and releasing it. Then slowly move the head
restraint forward until it is in the desired position.
The rear seats have head restraints that are adjustable
up and down, but they do not tilt.
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation (Sedan)
Folding the Seatback
The rear seatbacks can be folded down to increase
cargo space.
To fold down the seatback, do the following:
3. Pull up the release knob located on top of the rear
seatback.
4. Fold the rear seatback forward and down.
1. Remove the safety belt strap from the safety belt
guide by pulling it through the slot.
2. Push the head restraints all the way down.
1-7
To return the seatback to the upright position, do the
following:
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
4. Push down and rearward firmly on the top of the
seatback until it latches securely in the fully
upright position.
{CAUTION:
1. Hook the safety belts into the retaining clips.
2. Lift the seatback up and push it to its original
position.
3. Unhook the safety belts from the retaining clips.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
5. Insert the safety belt strap back into the safety belt
guide.
1-8
Rear Seat Operation (Hatchback)
Folding the Rear Seats
4. Move the safety belt buckles and safety belt in the
center seating position out of the space between
the seatback and the seat cushion so they are not in
the way as the seat is being folded.
The rear seats can be folded to increase cargo space.
To fold the rear seats, do the following:
1. Lower the head restraints completely.
2. Detach the center safety belt from the mini buckle
by pressing the black release button on the buckle.
5. Pull the release handles on the rear side of the seat
cushion to unlock the seat cushion.
6. Lift the seat cushion up and flip it forward.
3. Pull up the release knob, located on the top of the
seatback, and fold the seatback forward and down.
1-9
Unfolding the Seats
To return the rear seats to the normal seating position,
do the following:
1. Unclip the hook from the front seat head restraint.
2. Remove the safety belt buckles and center seat
safety belt from the storage area.
Notice: Damage to the safety belt buckle or rear
seat locking mechanism can occur if the safety belt
and buckles are pinched under the rear seat
cushion. Do not place the safety belt and buckles
on the floor under the rear seat cushion when
the rear seat is put back to the sitting position.
7. Clip the hook to the front seat head restraint to
keep the rear seat secure.
8. When the rear seat is folded, store the safety belt
buckles and center safety belt in the storage area
under the floor mat.
1-10
3. Push the seat cushion down to its original position
until it latches securely. Try to pull up on the seat to
make sure it is locked in place.
5. Lift the seatback up and push it back to its original
latched position.
6. Unhook the safety belts in the outboard seating
positions from the retaining clips.
7. Return the safety belt buckles and the center seat
safety belt to their original position between the rear
seatback and the seat cushion. Make sure the
straps of the safety belt and buckles are not twisted.
8. Reattach the center seat safety belt to the mini
buckle. See Center Rear Passenger Position on
page 1-28.
4. Hook the safety belts in the outboard seating
positions into the retaining clips.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
9. Push down and rearward firmly on the top of the
seatback until it latches securely in the fully
upright position.
1-11
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
1-12
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up.
See Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-32.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on
wheels.
1-13
Put someone on it.
1-14
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-15
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater
if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-16
be in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules for
smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your
vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-29 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-32. Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
1-17
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-28.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height
that is right for you. See Shoulder Belt Height
Adjustment on page 1-23.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
1-18
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-22
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt height
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away
from your face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder.
To move it down, press
the release button (A) and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
After you move the height adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without pressing the release
button to make sure it has locked into position.
1-23
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-17.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one
thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all
the way and start again.
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is
wearing them properly.
1-24
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Positions
Lap-Shoulder Belt
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Be sure you are using the correct buckle and that
the latch plate clicks when inserted into the buckle.
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-25
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
1-26
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a
crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of
the retractor.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-27
Center Rear Passenger Position
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has a removable safety belt in the center
rear seating position.
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver
and right front passenger. Although you cannot see
them, they are located on the retractor part of the safety
belts. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal crash.
Here is how to use the center rear safety belt.
1. Pull the center rear safety belt from the retractor.
2. Push the latch plate at the end of the safety
belt strap into the buckle with the black release
button until the mechanism clicks. Make sure the
strap is not twisted. The sliding latch plate will face
the front of the vehicle.
3. Pick up the sliding latch plate and pull the belt
across you. Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle.
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down the buckle end
of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-28
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-70.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-29
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
If the child is sitting in the center rear seat
passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would have
the restraint that belts provide.
1-30
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-31
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
CAUTION:
1-32
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-33
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-34
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area
that is unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal
injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-35
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
1-36
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which is
purchased by the vehicle’s owner. To help reduce
injuries, an add-on child restraint must be secured in
the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child restraints,
the child has to be secured within the child restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,
and some high-back booster seats have a five-point
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see
out the window.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be sure
the child restraint is designed to be used in a
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint.
You may find these instructions on the restraint
itself or in a booklet, or both.
1-37
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
1-38
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-42 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
There are several systems for securing the child within
the child restraint. One system, the three-point
harness, has straps that come down over each of the
infant’s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch.
The five-point harness system has two shoulder straps,
two hip straps, and a crotch strap. A shield may take
the place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder
straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low
against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield
has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like
shield that swings up or to the side.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Make sure the child is properly
secured, following the instructions that came
with that restraint.
Because there are different systems, it is important to
refer to the instructions that come with the restraint.
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child restraint.
1-39
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We, therefore, recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor
says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.”
This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is
so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag and side airbag (if equipped) if the
system detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag or airbags are off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move the
front passenger seat as far back as it will go.
It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
1-40
There are a couple of things you need to know about
using child restraints in your rear seat:
If you use a child restraint
in the center rear seating
position, the safety belts
and the child restraint
LATCH anchors for the rear
outside seating positions
will not be accessible.
Therefore, you will not be able to secure child restraints
or have passengers ride in the rear outside seating
positions.
If you use two child
restraints in the rear
outside seating positions,
the safety belt for the
center rear seat position
will not be accessible.
Therefore, you will not be able to secure a child
restraint or have a passenger ride in the center rear
seating position.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
1-41
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. The LATCH
system holds a child restraint during driving or in a
crash. This system is designed to make installation of a
child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following
the instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual. When installing a
child restraint with a top tether, you must also use either
the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly
secure the child restraint. A child restraint must never
be installed using only the top tether and anchor.
1-42
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint equipped with LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The following explains how
to attach a child restraint with these attachments in
your vehicle.
Your vehicle has lower anchors and top tether anchors.
Your child restraint may have lower attachments and
a top tether.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
1-43
Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many child
restraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether
or not a kit is available.
Rear Seat
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the seat
cushion, showing where
the anchors are located.
1-44
Hatchback models may have zippers over the lower
anchor areas. If so, unzip the seat cover below
the labels to access each lower anchor.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors,
the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the
trim cover.
Sedan
For sedan models, the top tether anchors are located
under the trim covers behind the rear seat on the
filler panel. Squeeze and pull the front part of the plastic
cover to access the top tether anchors. Be sure to
use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle
as the seating position where the child restraint will
be placed.
1-45
The cargo shade should remain off while the top tether
is in use. Be sure to use an anchor located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position where
the child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached. There is no place to attach the top
tether in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-40 for
additional information.
Hatchback
For hatchback models, the top tether anchors (B) are
located in the rear cargo area, attached to the back
wall (A) of the vehicle. Squeeze and pull the front part
of the plastic cover to access the top tether anchors.
Remove the cargo shade before installing the top tether.
1-46
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be
seriously injured or killed. Make sure that a
LATCH-type child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in
the vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-47
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Squeeze and pull the front part of the plastic
cover to access the top tether anchors.
2.3. For hatchback models, remove the cargo
shade before installing the top tether.
The cargo shade should remain off while
the top tether is in use.
2.4. Route and tighten the top tether according to
your child restraint instructions and the
following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you are
using a single tether,
route the tether over
the seatback.
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether,
route the tether over
the seatback.
If the position you are
using has a head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
under the head restraint
and in between the
head restraint posts.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable head
restraint and you are using
a single tether, route the
tether under the head
restraint and in between the
head restraint posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-48
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) on page 1-42.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child
restraint. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with
the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-40. There is not room for three child restraints
in the rear seat, but you can install two child restraints,
one in each rear outside seating position.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Buckle the belt. Be sure the latch plate clicks when
you put it into the buckle. This means you are using
the correct buckle. Also, make sure the release
button is positioned so you would be able to
unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-49
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-50
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
6. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether, attach and tighten the top
tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the
instructions that came with the child restraint and to
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 1-42.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is attached
to the top tether anchor, disconnect it. Unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-40.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is designed to
turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
side airbag (if equipped) when an infant in a rear-facing
infant seat or a small child in a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat is detected. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 1-64 and Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 3-26 for more information
on this including important safety information.
1-51
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag and side airbag (if equipped), if the
system detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an airbag or airbags will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag or airbags are off.
1-52
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat position, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the forward-facing
child restraint. See Manual Seats on page 1-2.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-42.
There is no top tether anchor in the right front
passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) on page 1-42 if your child restraint
has a top tether.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has airbags. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-64. General Motors recommends
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in a
rear seat, even if the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag and side airbag (if equipped) is off. If your
child restraint is forward-facing, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the child restraint
in this seat. See Manual Seats on page 1-2.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and side
airbag (if equipped), the off symbol in the passenger
airbag status indicator should light and stay lit
when you turn the ignition to ON or START. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-26.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-53
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-54
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
If a child restraint has been installed and the off symbol
is not lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the off symbol is still not lit, check to make sure
that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt. You should not be able
to pull more of the belt from the retractor once the
lock has been set.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
A thick layer of additional material such as a blanket, or
aftermarket equipment such as seat covers heaters
or massagers, located between the seat cushion and the
child restraint or small occupant, can affect how the
passenger sensing system operates. Remove any
additional material from the seat cushion before
reinstalling/securing the child restraint or small occupant.
If the off symbol is still not lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
8. If the airbag or airbags are off, the off symbol on
the instrument panel near the clock will be lit and
stay lit when the key is turned to ON or START.
1-55
Airbag System
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and a
frontal airbag for the right front passenger. Your vehicle
may also have side impact airbags. Side impact airbags
are available for the driver and right front passenger.
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the driver
and/or the right front passenger, the word AIRBAG
will appear on the airbag covering on the side of the
seatback closest to the door.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. Airbags are
designed to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy in moderate
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes.
CAUTION:
1-56
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
They are not designed to inflate in rollover,
rear crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for
some unrestrained occupants, frontal airbags
may provide less protection in frontal crashes
than more forceful airbags have provided in
the past.
Side impact airbags are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle. They are not
designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in
rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward,
it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for airbag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Front occupants should not lean on or sleep
against the door.
1-57
Where Are the Airbags?
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see Older Children on page 1-29 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-32.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-32
for more information.
1-58
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel.
The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact airbag
is in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-59
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
Do not put anything between an occupant and
an airbag, and do not attach or put anything
on the steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering. Do not let seat covers
block the inflation path of a side impact airbag.
If your vehicle has one, the passenger’s side impact
airbag is in the side of the passenger’s seatback closest
to the door.
1-60
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to
inflate only if the impact exceeds a predetermined
deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds take
into account a variety of desired deployment and
non-deployment events and are used to predict
how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that
does not move or deform, the threshold level is about
9 to 14 mph (14 to 23 km/h). (The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that
it can be somewhat above or below this range.)
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers,
rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle may or may not have a side impact airbag.
See Airbag System on page 1-56. Side impact airbags
are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. A side impact airbag will inflate if the crash
severity is above the system’s designed “threshold
level.” The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design. Side impact airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear
impacts. A side impact airbag is intended to deploy
on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and
how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal and
near-frontal impacts. For side impact airbags,
inflation is determined by the location and severity
of the impact.
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
1-61
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the airbag. The inflator, the airbag and related
hardware are all part of the airbag modules. Frontal
airbag modules are located inside the steering wheel and
instrument panel. For seating positions with side impact
airbags, there are also airbag modules in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
Side impact airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including many frontal or near frontal
collisions, and rear impacts, primarily because an
occupant’s motion is not toward those airbags.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts, and then only
in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions
for the frontal airbags, and only in moderate to
severe side collisions for vehicles with a side impact
airbag.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the
inside of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the
protection provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually.
But the frontal airbags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts,
and many side impacts, primarily because an
occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.
After the airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the airbag
inflated. Some components of the airbag module may
be hot for a short time. These components include
the steering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal airbag and
the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag. For seating positions with side impact
airbags, the side of the seatback closest to the door may
be hot. The parts of the airbag that come into contact
with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.
1-62
There will be some smoke and dust coming from the
vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does
not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield
or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop
people from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment,
you should seek medical attention.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your airbag system. If you do not get them,
the airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts.
The service manual for your vehicle covers the
need to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders on page 7-9.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
1-63
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible when you turn your ignition
key to ON or START. The airbag off symbol will be
visible near the clock, located in the center of the
instrument panel during the system check. When the
system check is complete, the airbag off symbol will be
visible under certain conditions. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-26.
The passenger sensing system works with a sensor that
is part of the right front passenger’s seat cushion.
The sensor is designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the
passenger’s frontal airbag and side impact airbag
(if equipped) should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear, rather than the front
seat. General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding
in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat, and an older child riding in a
booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and side airbag
(if equipped) under certain conditions. The driver’s
frontal airbag and driver’s side airbag (if equipped) are
not part of the passenger sensing system.
1-64
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag and side airbag (if equipped) if the
system detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag or airbags are off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move the
front passenger seat as far back as it will go.
It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and side airbag
(if equipped) if:
• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
• the system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat
• a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time
• the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints
• or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
passenger’s frontal airbag and side airbag (if equipped),
the off symbol near the clock will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag or airbags are off. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-26.
1-65
If a child restraint has been installed and the off symbol
is not lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 1-51.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the off symbol is still not lit, check to make sure
that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the off symbol is still not lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag and side airbag (if equipped) anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly
in the right front passenger’s seat. When the passenger
sensing system has allowed the airbag or airbags to
be enabled, the off symbol will not light.
1-66
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and side airbag (if equipped), depending
upon the person’s seating posture and body build.
Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown child
restraints should wear a safety belt properly — whether
or not there is an airbag for that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off symbol is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens do the following:
Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the
seatback in the fully upright position, then sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the person’s
legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle and have
the person remain in this position for about two minutes.
This will allow the system to detect that person and then
enable the passenger’s airbag or airbags.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection of
the frontal airbag and side airbag (if equipped).
See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-32 for
more on this, including important safety
information.
A thick layer of additional material such as a blanket, or
aftermarket equipment such as seat covers, seat
heaters and seat massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system operates. Remove any
additional material from the seat cushion before
reinstalling or securing the child restraint or small
occupant. You may want to consider not using seat
covers or other aftermarket equipment if your vehicle
has the passenger sensing system. See Adding
Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 1-68 for more information about modifications that
can affect how the system operates.
1-67
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. You do not want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle.
Your dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system.
To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-14.
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an airbag
when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
They are probably part of the airbag system.
Be sure to follow proper service procedures,
and make sure the person performing work for
you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-68
sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet
metal or height, they may keep the airbag system
from working properly. Also, the airbag system may
not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on
page 7-2.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic
module (located under the right front passenger’s
seat), or the instrument panel can affect the
operation of the airbag system. If you have
questions, call Customer Assistance. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance
are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, or
an airbag covering (if equipped) on a seatback,
the airbag may not work properly. You may have to
replace the airbag module in the steering wheel,
both the airbag module and the instrument panel
for the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, or both
the airbag module and the seatback for seating
positions with a side impact airbag (if equipped.)
Do not open or break the airbag coverings.
1-69
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new or LATCH
system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
1-70
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need to
replace the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety
belt pretensioners and safety belt. Be sure to do
so. Then the new pretensioner and safety belt will be
there to help protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and right
front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even if
the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver and
right front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your safety
belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been in a
collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays on after
you start your vehicle or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 3-32.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part about the airbag system
earlier in this section.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-5
Doors and Locks .............................................2-7
Door Locks ....................................................2-7
Central Door Unlocking System ........................2-8
Door Ajar Reminder ........................................2-8
Rear Door Security Locks ................................2-8
Lockout Protection ..........................................2-9
Trunk (Sedan) ................................................2-9
Liftgate (Hatchback) ......................................2-11
Windows ........................................................2-12
Manual Windows ..........................................2-12
Power Windows ............................................2-13
Sun Visors ...................................................2-13
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-14
Theft-Deterrent System ..................................2-14
Immobilizer ..................................................2-16
Immobilizer Operation ....................................2-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-17
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-17
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-18
Starting the Engine .......................................2-19
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-20
Automatic Transaxle Operation .......................2-21
Manual Transaxle Operation ...........................2-24
Parking Brake ..............................................2-26
Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle) ................................2-27
Shifting Out of Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle) ................................2-28
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transaxle) .........2-29
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-30
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-30
Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-31
Mirrors ...........................................................2-32
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-32
Outside Manual Mirrors ..................................2-32
Outside Power Mirror ....................................2-33
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-33
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-33
Storage Areas ................................................2-34
Glove Box ...................................................2-34
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-34
Sunglasses Storage Compartment ...................2-35
Sunroof .........................................................2-35
2-1
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The children or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
2-2
One key is used for the
ignition, the doors and all
other locks.
For vehicle security, keep the key tag in a safe place and
also record the key number somewhere other than inside
of the vehicle. If you lose your key, you will be able to
have a new one made easily using the tag.
Your vehicle may have an electronic immobilizer
designed to protect your car against theft. If so, only
keys with the correct electronic code can be used
to start the vehicle. See Immobilizer Operation on
page 2-16. Even if a key has the same profile, it will
not start the engine if the electronic code is incorrect.
If you need a new key, contact your dealer who
can obtain the correct key code. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-6 for more information.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer removes the
key tag and gives it to the first owner. The tag has a code
on it that tells your dealer how to make extra keys.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your
vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle to
get in. Be sure you have spare keys.
2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System
If the vehicle has the keyless entry system, it operates
on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-4
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-5.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
You can lock and unlock your doors from about 20 ft (6 m)
away using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
The following functions are
available if your vehicle
has the remote keyless
entry system:
K (Unlock):
Press this button to unlock all of the
doors. The hazard lamps will flash twice to indicate that
unlocking has occurred and that the theft-deterrent
system is deactivated.
The LED light on the transmitter will flash when the
buttons on the transmitter are pressed.
The lock and unlock buttons will not operate and the
theft-deterrent system will not activate while the key is
in the ignition.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Q (Lock):
Press this button to lock all of the doors.
If all of the doors and the trunk or liftgate are closed,
the hazard lamps will flash once and the horn will chirp
to indicate that locking has occurred and that the
theft-deterrent system is active.
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum
of five transmitters matched to it.
2-5
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the LED fails to
illuminate or if the transmitter will not work at the normal
range in any location. If you have to get close to your
vehicle before the transmitter works, it is probably
time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry
transmitter, do the following:
1. Remove the screw from the back of the cover and
open the cover of the transmitter.
2. Pull the transmitter out of the cover and carefully
detach the sticker from the unit. Keep the sticker
clean.
3. Remove the battery and replace it with the new
one. Make sure the positive side of the battery
faces up. Use one three-volt, CR1620, or
equivalent, type battery.
4. Attach the sticker and put the transmitter unit in
the cover.
5. Put the two halves back together and replace the
screw. Make sure the cover is on tightly, so water
will not get in.
6. Test the transmitter operation.
2-6
Doors and Locks
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Door Locks
From the outside, use your key or the remote keyless
entry transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 2-5.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked,
the handle will not open it. You increase
the chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash if the doors are not
locked. So, wear safety belts properly and
lock the doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors
can help prevent this from happening.
To manually unlock the doors from the outside, insert
the key and turn it toward the front of the vehicle.
To manually lock the doors from the outside, insert the
key and turn it toward the rear of the vehicle.
All doors, except for the driver’s door, can be locked by
pushing down the manual door lock and then closing
the door. The driver’s door can only by locked from the
outside by using the key or the optional remote
keyless entry transmitter.
From the inside, you can lock and unlock all of the
doors by pushing or pulling the manual door lock located
on each door.
2-7
Central Door Unlocking System
Rear Door Security Locks
The central door unlocking system is activated from the
driver’s door.
Your vehicle has rear door
security locks on each rear
door that help prevent
passengers from opening
the rear doors on your
vehicle from the inside.
From the outside, you can lock or unlock all the doors
by using either the key or the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if equipped. From the inside, you can lock
or unlock all the doors by using the driver’s door
lock switch while the driver’s door is closed.
Door Ajar Reminder
If one of the doors on your
vehicle is not closed
properly while the ignition
is on, the door ajar
light on the secondary
information center
will come on and stay on
until the doors are closed.
Using the Rear Door Security Lock
1. Move the lever upward to lock.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.
Notice: Pulling the inside door handle while the
rear door security locks are engaged could damage
your vehicle. Do not pull the inside door handle
while the rear door security locks are engaged.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside while this feature is in use.
2-8
Opening a Rear Door When the
Security Lock is On
1. Unlock the door from the inside.
2. Open the door from the outside.
If you do not cancel the security lock, adults or older
children who ride in the rear will not be able to open the
rear door from the inside. You should let adults and
older children know how to cancel the locks.
Canceling the Rear Door Security Lock
1. Unlock the door from the inside and open the
door from the outside.
2. Move the lever downward to unlock.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
Lockout Protection
This feature helps prevent locking your key in the car.
The driver’s door can only be locked with the door
closed. From the outside of the vehicle, close the
driver’s door and lock it using the key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter, if equipped.
This feature cannot guarantee that you will never be
locked out of your vehicle. Always remember to
take your key with you.
Trunk (Sedan)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-30.
To open the trunk on your sedan from outside of your
vehicle, insert the key into the lock cylinder and turn
the key clockwise or use the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if equipped.
2-9
Remote Trunk Release
Open the trunk from inside
your vehicle by pulling up
the release lever located
to the left side of the
driver’s seat.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
When closing the trunk, close from the center to
ensure it fully latches.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located on the underside of the trunk lid.
This handle will glow following exposure to light. Pull the
release handle down to open the trunk from the inside.
2-10
Liftgate (Hatchback)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the liftgate
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System on page 3-18.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-30.
To open the liftgate on your hatchback from outside of
the vehicle, insert the key into the lock cylinder and
turn it counterclockwise or use the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if equipped. Then pull up the handle
above the license plate to open the liftgate.
When closing the liftgate, close from the center to
ensure it fully latches.
To lock the liftgate, insert the key into the lock cylinder
and turn it clockwise or use the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if equipped.
The liftgate can also be locked or unlocked by the
central door unlocking system or remote keyless entry,
if equipped. See Central Door Unlocking System on
page 2-8 and Remote Keyless Entry System Operation
on page 2-5.
2-11
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
Manual Windows
Use the window crank to open and close each window.
The rear windows do not open fully.
2-12
Power Windows
Window Lockout
The window lockout is
located with the driver’s
power window switches.
Press the lockout button to stop the front and rear
passengers from using their window switches. The driver
can still operate all the windows with the lockout on.
Press the lockout button again to return to normal
window operation.
Sun Visors
If your vehicle has power windows, the switches are
located on the driver’s door. In addition, each passenger
door has a switch for its own window.
The ignition must be turned to ON to use the power
windows. To lower the window, press and hold
the switch. To raise the window, lift up on the switch.
Release the switch when the window reaches the
desired level.
To block out glare you can swing down the visors.
You can also remove them from the center mount and
swing them to the side.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle has vanity mirrors located on the back of
the sun visors. Swing down the sun visor to expose the
vanity mirror.
2-13
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
3. Lock the doors by pressing the lock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
• The LED light on the transmitter will flash once.
• All of the doors will lock.
• The hazard warning lamps will flash once and
the horn will chirp.
Theft-Deterrent System
Your vehicle may have a theft-deterrent system.
The theft-deterrent system will not arm when you lock
the doors using the key or the manual door lock. It arms
only when you use the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Arming the System
To arm the system, do the following:
1. Close the doors, the windows, the hood, and the
trunk or liftgate.
Ensure that the windows are closed, as the system
can be armed even if the windows are open.
2. Turn the key to LOCK and remove the key from the
ignition.
If the key is inserted in the ignition, the transmitter
will not arm the theft-deterrent system.
2-14
• The security light (A) will flash once every
second to indicate that the theft-deterrent system
is armed. The security light is located on the
secondary information center (SIC) on the center
of the instrument panel.
To avoid activating the alarm by accident, do one of the
following:
• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front door using
the key.
• Press the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
Unlocking a door any other way will activate the alarm
when a door or the trunk or liftgate is opened.
If you do not want to arm the theft-deterrent system,
lock the vehicle using the key or the manual door locks.
Disarming the System
To disarm the system, do one of the following:
• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front door using
the key.
• Press the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry
−
−
−
transmitter.
The LED light on the transmitter will flash once.
All of the doors will unlock.
The hazard warning lamps will flash twice.
If the door is not opened or if the engine is not started
within 30 seconds after disarming the system using
the transmitter, all of the doors will automatically lock
and the theft-deterrent mode will rearm.
How the System Alarm is Activated
If a door or the trunk or liftgate is opened without using
the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter, the
horn will sound and the lamps will flash for up to
30 seconds.
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
If the system alarm is active, it can be deactivated
using one of the following methods:
• Press the lock or unlock buttons on the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front door
using the key.
Otherwise, the alarm will automatically stop after
30 seconds. The system will then lock the doors and
rearm the theft-deterrent system.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
If the hazard warning lamps flash once when you
press the lock or unlock buttons on the remote
keyless entry transmitter, the theft-deterrent system
alarm was activated while you were away.
2-15
Immobilizer
Immobilizer Operation
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Your vehicle may have a passive theft-deterrent system.
The immobilizer system prevents your vehicle from
being started by unauthorized persons.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If your vehicle has an immobilizer system, your vehicle
has a special key that works with the theft-deterrent
system. There is a transponder in the key head that is
electronically coded. The correct key will start the
vehicle. An invalid key immobilizes the engine.
The immobilizer system isolates the power supply to the
ignition system, the fuel pump and the fuel injectors.
The engine immobilizer is activated after the key
is turned to LOCK and removed from the ignition.
The security light located on the top center of the
instrument panel in the secondary information center will
flash when the immobilizer is active. If the light does
not flash after removing the key, have the system
checked by your dealer.
The immobilizer system works when you turn the key to
START. If the immobilizer system does not recognize the
electronic code, the engine will not start and the security
indicator will continue blinking. If your key is ever
damaged, you may not be able to start your vehicle.
2-16
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the security light continues flashing, the key
may have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off
and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another key. At this time, you may
also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-81. If the engine still does not start
with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty.
See your dealer who can have a new key made.
Up to five keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
If you lose or damage your keys, only a GM dealer can
have new keys made.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine
if you turn it off. The theft-deterrent system, however,
is not working properly and must be serviced by
your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
theft-deterrent system at this time.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake, or slow, the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-35 for the trailer towing
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-17
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition
switch, you can turn the
key to four different
positions.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in.
If it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while
you turn the key hard. If none of this works,
then your vehicle needs service.
LOCK: This position locks your steering wheel, ignition,
shift lever and transaxle. This is the only position in
which you can insert or remove the key. For easier key
operation when unlocking the steering wheel, move the
steering wheel from right to left and turn the key to ACC.
ACC (Accessory): This position operates some of your
electrical accessories, such as the radio, but not the
climate control system.
{CAUTION:
On manual transaxle vehicles, turning the key
to LOCK and removing it will lock the steering
column and result in a loss of ability to steer
the vehicle. This could cause a collision. If you
need to turn the engine off while the vehicle is
moving, turn the key only to ACC. Do not push
the key in while the vehicle is moving.
ON: This is the position to which the switch returns
after you start your engine and release the key.
The switch stays in ON when the engine is running.
But even when the engine is not running, you can use
ON to operate your electrical accessories, and to display
some instrument panel warning lights.
START: This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The switch will return to
ON for normal driving. Do not turn the key to START
if the engine is running.
Even if the engine is not running, ACC and ON allow
you to operate electrical accessories, such as the radio.
2-18
Starting the Engine
Automatic Transaxle
Move the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
The engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transaxle
The shift lever should be in NEUTRAL and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and
start the engine. Your vehicle will not start if the clutch
pedal is not all the way down — that is a safety feature.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go
of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it does not start, wait about 15 seconds and try
again to start the engine by turning the ignition to
START. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
When the engine has run about 10 seconds to
warm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven. Do not
run your engine at high speed when it is cold.
If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C),
let the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.
3. If the engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing,
but this time keep the pedal down for five or
six seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from
the engine.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
2-19
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment, behind the battery.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-Volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
2-20
Automatic Transaxle Operation
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If your vehicle has an automatic transaxle, the shift
lever is located on the console between the seats.
Movement between certain positions requires pushing
the shift lever toward the passenger side while shifting.
This prevents you from changing positions unexpectedly
by blocking the straight movement of the shift lever
while the vehicle is moving.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle)
on page 2-27.
Ensure that the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle shift lock control system. You have to apply
your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the key is in ON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P)
while holding the brake pedal down, see Shifting Out of
Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle) on page 2-28.
2-21
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
When shifting from NEUTRAL (N) to REVERSE (R),
you need to apply the regular brake and push the shift
lever down and toward the passenger side of the
vehicle and then forward.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-28.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart while you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
while the engine is running at high speed may
damage the transaxle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speeds when shifting your vehicle.
2-22
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D4): This position is for
normal driving.
When operating your vehicle in severe cold conditions
the transaxle may be prevented from shifting into
D4 until the transaxle fluid has warmed up to its
operational temperature.
Notice: Driving your vehicle if you notice that it
is moving slowly or not shifting gears as you
increase speed may damage the transaxle.
Have your vehicle serviced right away. You can
drive in SECOND (2) when you are driving less than
35 mph (55 km/h) and AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D4)
for higher speeds until then.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use your brakes off and on.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle will not shift
into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes, or parking brake to hold the vehicle
in place.
If there is a malfunction with the automatic transaxle,
the Check Engine Light or the HOLD indicator light will
turn on or flash. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-35 or Hold Mode Light on page 3-34.
Have your vehicle fixed as soon as possible.
Notice: Do not drive in SECOND (2) at speeds
over 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damage
the transaxle. Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D4) as
much as possible. Do not shift into SECOND (2)
unless you are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h)
or you can damage your engine.
2-23
Hold Mode
Hold Mode Features
If your vehicle’s transaxle has hold mode, you can
select this mode to drive with some characteristics of a
manual transaxle. With hold mode turned on, the
automatic transaxle will stay in a specific gear range.
Winter Function
Select hold mode while in AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D4) to help the vehicle maintain
traction on slippery road surfaces, such as snow,
mud, or ice.
Manually Controlling Shift
Select hold mode to use your automatic transaxle like
a three-speed manual transaxle.
Manual Transaxle Operation
Five-Speed
This is your shift pattern.
Press the HOLD button on the shift lever console to turn
on hold mode. Press the button again to turn off hold
mode, and return to normal automatic transaxle operation.
While on, the HOLD light on the secondary information
center will light up. See Hold Mode Light on page 3-34.
When hold mode is activated, the transaxle is fixed
in the gear selected.
2-24
Here is how to operate your manual transaxle:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going less
than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a complete
stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press the
clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5), the same way
you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
NEUTRAL.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutch
pedal, lift up the ring on the shift lever and shift
into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly
while pressing the accelerator pedal.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake,
for parking your vehicle.
Shift Speeds
{CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You could
injure yourself or others. Do not shift down
more than one gear at a time when you
downshift.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
2-25
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition
is on, the brake system warning light will come on.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-27.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
the release button. Hold the release button in as you
move the brake lever all the way down.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
The parking brake lever is located between the
bucket seats.
2-26
Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle)
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transaxle)
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow.
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pushing the
lever toward the passenger side of the vehicle and
then up.
3. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P). If you can, it means
that the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-27
Torque Lock (Automatic Transaxle)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle) on page 2-27.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-28
Shifting Out of Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle)
Your automatic transaxle vehicle has an automatic
transaxle shift lock control system. You have to
fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift
from PARK (P) when the ignition is turned to ON.
See Automatic Transaxle Operation on page 2-21.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P) while holding the
brake pedal down, try this:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition off and remove the key.
3. Remove the cover over the shift-lock release slot
by prying it off using a small, flat object, like a
screwdriver. The shift-lock release slot is located at
the top of the shift lever.
4. Insert the key into the
shift-lock release slot
and press and hold
the key.
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transaxle)
Before leaving your vehicle, do the following:
1. Hold the brake pedal down and firmly apply the
parking brake.
2. Fully press in the clutch pedal and place the shift
lever into the gear position as stated below:
• When parking on level ground, place the shift
lever into NEUTRAL.
• When parking downhill, place the shift lever in
5. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
6. Remove the key from the shift-lock release slot,
insert the key into the ignition and start the
engine.
7. Replace the shift-lock release slot cover.
REVERSE (R).
• When parking uphill, place the shift lever in
FIRST (1).
3. After shifting, turn the ignition to LOCK, remove the
key and release the clutch.
8. Apply and hold the regular brake fully and release
the parking brake.
9. Shift to the gear you want.
10. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
2-29
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
2-30
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-30.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever
to PARK (P).
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle)
on page 2-27.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 4-24.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
trailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-35.
2-31
Mirrors
Outside Manual Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
The outside rearview mirrors should be adjusted so you
can see a little of the side of your vehicle when you
are sitting in a comfortable driving position.
While sitting in a comfortable driving position, adjust the
mirror so you can see clearly behind your vehicle.
Grip the mirror in the center to move it up or down and
side to side. The control at the bottom of the mirror
is the day/night feature that allows adjustment to the
mirror so that the glare of headlamps from behind
is reduced. Push the control for daytime use; pull it for
night use.
Adjust the outside manual mirrors using the control
lever located next to the mirror.
The outside rearview mirrors can be folded flat against
the side of the vehicle by pushing them toward the
vehicle’s doors.
2-32
Outside Power Mirror
Your vehicle may have an outside power mirror control
that adjusts the passenger’s side mirror.
The control for the power
mirror is located on the
driver’s door panel,
above the power window
buttons.
To adjust the passenger’s side mirror, press the
corresponding edges located on the four-way control
pad to move the mirror in the direction that you want it
to go. The ignition must be turned to ON to adjust
the mirrors.
The outside rearview mirrors can be folded flat against
the side of the vehicle by pushing them toward the
vehicle’s doors.
Outside Convex Mirror
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s
surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver’s
seat. It also makes things, like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are.
Outside Heated Mirrors
If your vehicle has this feature, when you operate the rear
window defogger, the heated driver’s and passenger’s
outside power mirrors are warmed to help clear them of
ice, snow, and condensation. See “Rear Window and
Outside Mirror Defogger” under Climate Control System
on page 3-18 for more information.
2-33
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Open the glove box by pulling the bottom of the handle
upward.
Cupholder(s)
The two cupholders are located in the center instrument
panel, below the climate control system. To use the
cupholder, push in on its outer edge. Then pull out the
cupholder. After use, push in the cupholder until it
latches.
There is also a cupholder located in the rear part of the
center console, behind the parking brake.
Your vehicle has shopping hooks on each front seatback
for your convenience.
2-34
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
Sunroof
If the vehicle has this
feature, the switch is
located on the headliner
between the sun visors.
If your vehicle has this feature, the sunglasses storage
compartment is located above the driver’s door.
To open the sunglasses storage compartment, pull
down and hold the upper part of the cover. To close the
compartment, let go of the cover and the compartment
will automatically close.
The sunroof will only operate when the ignition is turned
to ON. The sunroof can be opened to a vent position
or it can be opened all of the way.
You must manually open and close the sunroof cover.
To open the sunroof to the vent position, open the
sunroof cover. Then press and hold UP. To return the
sunroof to its original position, press DOWN and
hold it until the sunroof reaches the desired position.
To fully open the sunroof, open the sunroof cover.
Then press and hold DOWN. To close the sunroof, press
UP and hold it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof will
stop if the switch is released during operation.
In both the vent and fully open positions, the air flow can
be adjusted for driving comfort by pushing and holding
the switch until the sunroof moves to the desired position.
The sunroof cannot be opened or closed if the vehicle
has an electrical failure.
2-35
✍ NOTES
2-36
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-8
Windshield Washer .........................................3-9
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...........................3-10
Cruise Control ..............................................3-10
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-13
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-14
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-14
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-15
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-15
Dome Lamp .................................................3-16
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-16
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-17
Climate Controls ............................................3-18
Climate Control System .................................3-18
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-21
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-22
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-23
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-24
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-25
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-25
Tachometer .................................................3-25
Safety Belt Reminder Tone ............................3-25
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-26
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-27
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-28
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-29
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-29
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Indicator Light ...........................................3-29
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-30
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-30
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Secondary Information Center (SIC) .................3-31
Clock ..........................................................3-32
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-32
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-32
Charging System Light ..................................3-33
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-34
Hold Mode Light ...........................................3-34
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-35
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-38
Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-39
Door Ajar Light .............................................3-39
3-2
Audio System(s) .............................................3-39
AM-FM Radio ...............................................3-40
Radio with CD
(Single Display, Base Level) .......................3-42
Radio with CD (Single Display, MP3) ...............3-46
Radio with CD
(Double Display, MP3/WMA) .......................3-54
Radio with Six-Disc CD
(Double Display, MP3/WMA) .......................3-63
Radio Reception ...........................................3-72
Care of Your CDs .........................................3-72
Care of the CD Player ...................................3-72
Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-73
Backglass Antenna .......................................3-73
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlet. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-21.
B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-24.
C. Digital Clock and Secondary Information Center.
See Clock on page 3-32 and Secondary Information
Center (SIC) on page 3-31.
D. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
E. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See Instrument
Panel Brightness on page 3-15.
F. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-10.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.
Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-39.
Cupholder. See Cupholder(s) on page 2-34.
Ashtray. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter on
page 3-17.
K. Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette
Lighter on page 3-17.
L. Climate Control System. See Climate Control
System on page 3-18.
M. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-34.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Horn
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others.
They also let police know you have a problem.
Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on
and off.
Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
in the center of the
instrument panel.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in the
ignition switch.
Tilt Wheel
Your vehicle has a tilt wheel which allows you to adjust
the steering wheel before you drive. You can raise it
to the highest level to give your legs more room when
you exit and enter the vehicle.
The tilt wheel lever is
located underneath the
steering column slightly
to the left.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
3-6
To tilt the steering wheel, hold the wheel and push the
lever down. Then, move the wheel to a comfortable
position and pull the lever up to lock the wheel in place.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash
in the direction of the turn
or lane change.
Uplevel shown, Base similar
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-7.
• Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See Headlamp
High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-8.
• Exterior Light Control. See Exterior Lamps on
page 3-13.
• Fog Lamps, if equipped. See Fog Lamps on
page 3-15.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers will not see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then check
the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-81.
3-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal/multifunction lever away from you.
When the high beams
are on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
also will be on if the
ignition is turned to ON.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever
toward you until the high-beam headlamps come on,
then release the lever to turn them off.
Sedan shown, Hatchback similar
Use this lever located on the right side of the steering
wheel to operate the windshield wipers. The ignition
must be turned to ON to operate the windshield wipers.
HI (High Speed): Move the lever to this position for
wiping at high speed.
LO (Low Speed): Move the lever to this position for
steady wiping at low speed.
3-8
INT (Intermittent): Move the lever to this position to
choose a delayed wiping cycle.
Windshield Washer
OFF: Move the lever to this position to turn off the
windshield wipers.
To wash your windshield, pull the windshield
washer/wiper lever toward you with the ignition
turned to ON.
Misting Function
Move the lever toward INT for a single wiping cycle.
Hold it there until the windshield wipers start; then let go.
The windshield wipers will stop after one wipe. If you
want more wipes, hold the band toward INT longer.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent you
from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid
damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them.
If they are frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. If your blades do become damaged, get
new blades or blade inserts.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
When you release the lever, the washers will stop, but
the wipers will continue to wipe for several cycles and
will either stop or will resume at the speed you were
using before.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
3-9
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
Your vehicle may have a rear window washer/wiper.
Operate the rear window washer/wiper system by
pushing the windshield washer/wiper lever away from
you. The wiper operates intermittently when the lever is
in the first position. Washer fluid sprays onto the rear
window and the wiper operates continuously when
the lever is pushed to the second position.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.
If you can wash your windshield but not your rear
window, check the fluid level.
3-10
Cruise Control
If your vehicle has cruise control, you can maintain a
speed of about 24 mph (39 km/h) or more without
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really
help on long trips. Cruise control does not work at
speeds below 24 mph (39 km/h).
When you apply your brakes, or the clutch pedal if you
have a manual transaxle, the cruise control turns off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
Setting Cruise Control
3. Press the SET button and release it. The cruise
control light will come on to show you that the
cruise control is on.
{CAUTION:
4. Take your foot off the accelerate pedal.
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
The cruise control pad is
located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
1. Press the ON OFF
button (A) to turn
cruise control on.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake pedal, or the clutch
pedal if you have a manual transaxle. This, of course,
shuts off the cruise control. But you do not need to
reset it. Once you are going about 24 mph (39 km/h)
or more, you can briefly press the RESUME button.
You will go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold in the RESUME button longer, the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the button
or apply the brake pedal. So unless you want to
go faster, do not hold in the RESUME button.
2. Accelerate to the speed you want.
3-11
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to a higher speed.
Press the SET button, then release the button and
the accelerator pedal. You will now cruise at the
higher speed.
• Press the RESUME button. Hold it there until you
get up to the speed you want, and then release
the button. To increase your speed in very
small amounts, briefly press the RESUME button
and then release it. Each time you do this, your
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
The accelerate feature will only work after you turn on
the cruise control by pressing the SET button.
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
• Press the SET button until you reach the lower
speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the SET button. Each time you do this, you will go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
3-12
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake pedal takes you out of cruise control.
Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and do
not use cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal, or press the clutch
pedal, if you have a manual transaxle.
• Press the ON OFF button on the cruise control pad.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamp band has three positions:
3(Headlamps): Turn the band to this position to turn
on the headlamps, together with the following:
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamp
• Instrument Panel Lights
The headlamps will automatically turn off when the
ignition key is turned to lock or accessory.
; (Parking Lamps):
Uplevel shown, Base similar
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
Turn the band to this position to
turn on the parking lamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
OFF: Turn the band to this position to turn all lamps off,
except the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
3-13
Headlamps on Reminder
An indicator light on instrument panel cluster will come
on when the DRL system is on.
If you open the driver’s door with the ignition turned to
LOCK or ACC while leaving the lamps on, you will
hear a warning chime.
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker
lamps, parking lamps and instrument panel lights
will not be illuminated unless you have turned the
exterior lamps control to the parking lamp or headlamp
position.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,
but they can be especially helpful in the short periods
after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime
running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold
in Canada.
The DRL system will make your low-beam headlamps
come on when the following conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamp band is in OFF or in the parking
lamp position.
• The parking brake is released.
3-14
The DRL system will turn off when one of the following
conditions are met:
•
•
•
•
•
The ignition is off.
The parking brake is on.
The high-beam headlamps are on.
The low-beam headlamps are on.
The flash-to-pass feature is used.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Fog Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
If your vehicle has fog lamps, use them for better
visibility in foggy or misty conditions. The control for the
fog lamps is a band located on the middle of the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
While using the fog lamps, the ignition must be turned
to ON and the low-beam headlamps or parking
lamps must be on.
Turn the band to ON to turn the fog lamps on.
An indicator light on the secondary information center
will come on when the fog lamps are on. See Fog Lamp
Light on page 3-39.
Turn the band to OFF to turn the fog lamps off. The fog
lamps will also turn off when the high-beam headlamps
are turned on. When the high-beam headlamps are
turned off, the fog lamps will turn on again.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
The thumbwheel for this feature is located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column.
Turn the thumbwheel clockwise to brighten the lights or
counterclockwise to dim them.
3-15
Dome Lamp
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Your vehicle will have one of the following dome lamp
switches.
With the accessory power outlet, you can plug in
auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular
telephone or CB radio.
The accessory power outlet is located next to the
parking brake on the center console.
To use the outlet, remove the protective cap. When not
in use, always cover the outlet with the protective
cap. The accessory power outlet is operational when
the ignition is turned to ACC or ON.
With Sunroof
Without Sunroof
The switches have three positions.
ON: The light comes on and stays on.
O (Door): The light comes on when a door is opened.
The light turns off when all the doors are closed.
OFF: The light remains off even when a door is opened.
3-16
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check
with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the equipment.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
The ashtray is located at the lower part of the center
instrument panel. To remove the front ashtray for
cleaning, open the ashtray fully, press in the retaining
tab and pull the bin out.
The cigarette lighter is located to the right of the front
ashtray. To use it, turn the ignition to ACC or ON, push
the cigarette lighter in all the way and let go. When it
is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while
it is heating.
3-17
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
In any setting other than off, the fan will run continuously
with the ignition on. The fan must be on in order for
the air conditioning compressor to run.
To change the current mode, select one of the following
from the right knob:
Y (Vent):
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
\ (Bi-Level):
This mode directs about half of the air
to the instrument panel outlets, and then directs the
remaining air to the floor outlets.
[ (Floor):
This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets. Some of the air will also be directed to the
rear outlets. Be sure to keep the area under the front
seats clear to allow the flow of air to the rear
compartment.
Uplevel shown, Base similar
Temperature Control: Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to manually increase or decrease
the temperature inside your vehicle. Turn the knob to the
blue area for cool air and to the red area for warm air.
9(Fan):
Turn the middle knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
3-18
The right knob can also be used to select the defog and
defrost modes. Information on defogging and defrosting
can be found later in this section.
? (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air from
coming into the vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside
air and odors from entering your vehicle or to help heat or
cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.
If your vehicle has a recirculation button (uplevel model),
press the button to turn the recirculation mode on.
When the button is pressed, an indicator light in the
button will come on. Press the button again to return to
outside air mode.
If your vehicle has a lever (base model), move the lever
to choose the recirculation mode.
Using the recirculation mode for extended periods may
cause your windows to fog. If this happens, select the
defrost mode.
: (Outside Air):
This mode brings outside air into
the vehicle.
If your vehicle has a recirculation button (uplevel model),
press the button until the recirculation mode is turned off.
Your vehicle will then return to outside air mode.
If your vehicle has a lever (base model), move the lever
to choose the outside air mode.
A/C (Air Conditioning): If your vehicle has air
conditioning, follow these steps to use the system.
Start the engine and set the fan control knob to
the desired speed. The air conditioning compressor
does not operate when the fan control knob is in the off
position. Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning
compressor on and off. When the A/C button is pressed,
an indicator light in the button will come on to let you
know that air conditioning is activated.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the vent mode.
2. Select the highest fan speed.
3. Press the A/C button.
4. Select the recirculation mode.
5. Select the coolest temperature.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become
too dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
your vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
3-19
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
or moisture condensing on the cool window glass.
This can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or
frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode to
clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm
the passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog
or frost from the windshield more quickly.
For best results, clear all snow and ice from the
windshield before defrosting.
Select one of these available modes from the
right knob.
0 (Defog):
This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield and the floor outlets. A small amount of air
is also directed to the outboard outlets for the side
windows and to the instrument panel side outlets.
When you select this mode, the system runs the
air-conditioning compressor. To defog the windows
faster, turn the temperature control knob clockwise to
the warmest setting.
3-20
1 (Defrost): This mode directs the air to the
windshield and the outboard outlets for the side
windows. A small amount of air is also directed to the
instrument panel side outlets. When you select this
mode, the system runs the air-conditioning compressor.
To defrost the windows faster, turn the temperature
control knob clockwise to the warmest setting.
Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.
Rear Window and Outside Mirror
Defogger
Your vehicle may have a rear window and outside
mirror defogger. This feature will only work when the
ignition is turned to ON.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window. Before using
this feature, clear as much snow from the rear window
as possible.
< (Rear Window Defogger):
Press this button to
turn the rear window and outside mirror defogger on or
off. An indicator light in the button will come on to let
you know that the feature is activated.
Outlet Adjustment
If your vehicle does not have air conditioning, the rear
window defogger will remain on until the button is
pressed again.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
If your vehicle has air conditioning, the rear window
defogger will turn off about 10 minutes after the button
is pressed. The defogger can also be turned off by
pressing the button again or by turning the engine off.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar to
the defogger grid.
Use the knob located in the center of each outlet to
change the direction of the airflow.
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
3-21
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Your vehicle may have a passenger compartment
air filter. It is located behind the glove box and can be
accessed after removing the glove box from its housing.
The filter traps most of the pollen from air entering
the module. Like your engine’s air cleaner/filter, it may
need to be changed periodically.
To change the passenger compartment air filter, use the
following steps:
3. Remove the filter cover by pressing in on the
bottom retaining tab and pulling the cover down.
4. Remove the old passenger compartment air filter.
5. Then reverse the steps to install the new air
filter and replace the glove box.
View the air flow arrows on the filter before installing
to ensure you install the filter correctly.
1. Open the glove box halfway down.
2. Grip the glove box by both the upper and lower
sides and pull it out of its housing.
3-22
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
as you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning
lights and gages. They’re a big help.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine
just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar
with this section, you should not be alarmed when
this happens.
3-23
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how fast
you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will need to drive safely and economically.
Your vehicle’s instrument panel cluster includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained on the
following pages.
3-24
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven in either miles, used in the United States,
or kilometers, used in Canada.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can record the number of miles, used
in the United States, or kilometers, used in Canada,
traveled for up to two trips.
You can cycle between the odometer and trip
odometers A and B by pressing the reset button located
in the lower right area of the speedometer. By pressing
the reset button, you can tell how many miles or
kilometers have been recorded on either Trip A or Trip B
since you last set the trip odometer back to zero.
To reset each trip odometer to zero, press and hold the
reset button. The reset button resets only the trip
odometer that is being displayed. Each trip odometer
must be reset individually.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays your engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
Safety Belt Reminder Tone
If your vehicle has this feature, a tone will sound for
several seconds when the ignition is turned to ON
to remind people to fasten their safety belts.
The tone will not sound if the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
3-25
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has a
passenger airbag status
indicator in the clock,
located in the center of
the instrument panel.
When the ignition key is turned to ON or START,
the passenger airbag status indicator will light for
several seconds as a system check. Then, after several
more seconds, if the off symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and side airbag (if equipped).
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-64 for
more on this, including important safety information.
If the off symbol is not lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and side airbag (if equipped) are enabled
(may inflate).
3-26
{CAUTION:
If the off symbol in the passenger airbag
status indicator does not come on when you
have a rear-facing child restraint installed in
the right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not turned
off the passenger’s frontal airbag and side
airbag (if equipped). A child in a rear-facing
child restraint can be seriously injured or killed
if the right front passenger’s airbag or airbags
inflate. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag or airbags. Do not use a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat unless the airbag or airbags
have been turned off.
Brake System Warning Light
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens,
have the vehicle serviced promptly, because
an adult-size person sitting in the right
front passenger’s seat may not have the
protection of the frontal airbag and side airbag
(if equipped). See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 3-32 for more on this, including important
safety information.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes
on, there is a brake
problem. Have your
brake system inspected
right away.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does not fully
release. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
3-27
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push or the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,
have the vehicle towed for service.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Your vehicle has an
engine coolant temperature
gage. With the ignition
to ON, this gage shows
the engine coolant
temperature.
If the gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine
is too hot. It means that your engine coolant has
overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-24.
3-28
Cruise Control Light
If equipped, this light
comes on whenever you
set your cruise control.
The light will go out when the cruise control is turned
off. See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more
information.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
whenever the high-beam
headlamps are on.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Indicator Light
This light will come on
when the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) are on.
A flashing DRL light indicates a possible burned out
headlamp, or that the vehicle may need service to repair
a defective DRL relay. See your GM dealer.
See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 3-14 for
more information.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8
for additional information.
3-29
• The indicator moves a little when you turn a corner
Fuel Gage
Your fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have left when the
ignition is turned to ON.
or speed up.
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the
ignition.
Low Fuel Warning Light
This light comes on when
the vehicle is low on fuel.
When the tank nears empty, the low fuel warning light
will come on. You still have a little fuel left, but you
should get more soon. See Low Fuel Warning Light on
page 3-30 for more information.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
3-30
The low fuel warning light comes on when there is
approximately 1.7 gallons (6.0 liters) of fuel remaining in
the tank.
To turn the light off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Filling
the Tank on page 5-7.
Secondary Information Center (SIC)
The secondary information center (SIC) displays some of the warning lights and indicators. The SIC is located in
the center of the instrument panel, above the center air outlets. The digital clock is also located in the center of the
SIC. See Clock on page 3-32 and Instrument Panel Overview on page 3-4 for more information.
3-31
Clock
Airbag Readiness Light
Your vehicle has a digital clock. The clock is located in
the secondary instrument cluster on the center of the
instrument panel, above the center air outlets. When the
ignition is turned to ACC or ON, the time is displayed
in the digital clock. There are two adjusting buttons
for the digital clock:
H (Hour): To go forward one hour, press the H button
once. To go forward more than one hour, press and
hold the button until the correct hour is reached.
M (Minute): To go forward one minute, press the
M button once. To go forward more than one minute,
press and hold the button until the correct minute
is reached.
After disconnecting the battery or replacing the fuse,
reset the clock.
There is an airbag readiness light on the secondary
information center (SIC), which shows the airbag
symbol. The system checks the airbag’s electrical
system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is
an electrical problem. The system check includes
the airbag sensor, the airbag modules, the wiring and
the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more
information on the airbag system, see Airbag System
on page 1-56.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
The safety belt light will
come on and stay on until
the driver’s safety belt
is buckled.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, the light will not
come on.
3-32
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go
out. This means the
system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on or flashes when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly. Have
your vehicle serviced right away by your GM dealer.
Charging System Light
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds
when you turn the ignition to ON. If the light does not
come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you
if there is a problem.
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
and the engine is not
running, as a check
to show you it is working.
Then it should go out when the engine is started.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the electrical charging system.
Have it checked by your GM dealer. Driving while this
light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on,
be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the
radio and air conditioner.
3-33
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
If your vehicle has an
anti-lock brake system,
this light will come on when
the ignition is turned to
ON and may stay on
for several seconds.
That is normal.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK. Or, if the
light comes on, stop as soon as possible and turn
the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the
system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again
while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.
See your GM dealer. If the regular brake system warning
light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do not
have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you do not have anti-lock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-27.
3-34
The anti-lock brake system warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition to ON. This is normal.
If the light does not come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Hold Mode Light
If your vehicle has this
feature, this light will come
on when the hold mode
is active.
If the HOLD mode light flashes, have your vehicle
checked. See “Hold Mode” under Automatic Transaxle
Operation on page 2-21 for additional information
on this feature.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The Check Engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good,
and your engine may not run as smoothly. This could
lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by
your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine, transaxle,
exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your vehicle or
replacement tires that do not match your vehicle’s
original tires can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may also
result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.
3-35
When the ignition is on, this light should come on and
should go out after a few seconds as a check to
show you it is working. If the light does not come on,
have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
3-36
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and see your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You also may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-7.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly installed. A loose
or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix
any mechanical or electrical problems that may
have developed.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
Check Engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
3-37
Oil Pressure Light
If you have low engine oil
pressure, this light will stay
on after you start your
engine, or come on when
you are driving.
This indicates that your engine is not receiving enough
oil. The engine could be low on oil, or could have
some other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately by
your GM dealer.
The oil light could also come on in three other situations:
• When the ignition is on but the engine is not
running, the light will come on as a test to show you
it is working. The light will go out when you turn
the ignition on. If it does not come on with the
ignition on, you may have a problem with the fuse
or bulb. Have it fixed right away.
• If you are idling at a stop sign, the light may blink
on and then off.
• If you make a hard stop, the light may come on for
a moment. This is normal.
3-38
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Audio System(s)
Fog Lamp Light
If your vehicle has this
feature, the fog lamps light
will come on when the
fog lamps are in use.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 3-15 for more information.
Door Ajar Light
The door ajar light will
come on whenever a door
is opened, regardless
of the ignition position.
If the key is in the ignition while the driver’s door is
open, you will also hear a warning chime.
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read the
pages following to familiarize yourself with its features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer
driving experience. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
By taking a few moments to read this manual and
get familiar with your vehicle’s audio system, you can
use it with less effort, as well as take advantage of
its features. While your vehicle is parked, set up your
audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations,
setting the tone and adjusting the speakers. Then,
when driving conditions permit, you can tune to your
favorite stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
3-39
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
driving. For more information, see Defensive Driving
on page 4-2.
AM-FM Radio
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone units. If sound equipment can
be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with the
operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other
systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s
systems may interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added.
3-40
Playing the Radio
O(Power): Press this knob to turn the system on and off.
u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume. VOL will appear on the display.
Finding a Station
AM/FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show the selection.
p (Tune):
Turn this knob to select radio stations.
t u (Scan):
Press this knob until SCAN flashes on
the display, then press either the up or the down
arrow buttons to determine the direction for the radio to
scan the stations. The radio will go to a station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next station.
Press either arrow button again to stop scanning.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Press this button until TRE appears on the display.
Then turn the volume knob to increase or to decrease
the treble. The display will show the treble level.
If a station is weak or noisy, decrease the treble.
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM)
can be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
f(Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance between
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM/FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
for longer than two seconds. Ch will appear on the
display when the station has been set. Whenever
that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
f(Bass/Treble):
Press this button until BAS appears
on the display. Then turn the volume knob to increase
or to decrease the bass. The display will show the
bass level.
the right and the left speakers, press this button
until BAL appears on the display. Then turn the volume
knob to increase or to decrease the balance between
the right and the left speakers. The display will show the
balance level.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this button until FAD appears on the
display. Then turn the volume knob to increase or
to decrease the fade between the front and the rear
speakers. The display will show the fade level.
3-41
Radio with CD
(Single Display, Base Level)
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),
can be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM/FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
Playing the Radio
ON/OFF: Press this knob to turn the system on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
Finding a Station
AM/FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show the selection.
TUN (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
SCAN: Push and release this knob to scan radio
stations. The radio will go to a station, play for a
few seconds, then go on to the next station.
Push this knob again to stop scanning.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-42
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
for longer than two seconds. The pushbutton number
will flash on the display when the station has been
set. Whenever that numbered pushbutton is pressed,
the station that was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Automatic Store
Six FM1 preset stations with the strongest reception
in the region can be automatically stored. Press the
AST button for longer than one second. Once the
stations are stored, the radio will switch to FM1 and
the first preset station will begin to play. FM-A will
appear on the display when listening to the automatic
stored stations. Press the AM-FM button to cancel
automatic store.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
SOUND (Bass/Treble): Press this button until BAS
appears on the display. Then turn the volume knob to
increase or to decrease the bass. The display will show
the bass level. When finished making the selection,
press this button to select the bass level.
SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, press this button
until BAL appears on the display. Then turn the volume
knob to increase or to decrease. The display will
show the balance level. When finished making the
selection, press this button to select the balance level.
Press this button until TRE appears on the display.
Turn the volume knob to increase or to decrease
the treble. The display will show the treble level.
When finished making the selection, press this button to
select the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy,
decrease the treble.
SOUND (Equalization): Press this button until EQ OFF
appears on the display to select customized equalization
settings designed for classic, pop, rock, jazz, and voice.
Turn the volume knob until the desired equalization
setting appears on the display. When finished making
the selection, press the SOUND button to select
the equalization setting.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this button until FAD appears on the
display. Turn the volume knob to increase or to
decrease the fade between the front and the rear
speakers. The display will show the fade level.
When finished making the selection, press this button
to select the fade level.
To cancel an equalization setting, press the SOUND
button until EQ OFF appears on the display, turn the
volume knob until OFF appears on the display,
then press the SOUND button again to select the
equalization setting.
3-43
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in and the CD should begin
playing. You can insert a CD with the ignition off.
the CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD is
soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-72 for
more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
When the CD is inserted, CDP will appear on the
display. As the CD is loading Filecheck will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, Track and
the track number will appear on the display.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When a CD is in
the player and the ignition is turned on, the radio must
be turned on before the CD will start playback. When
the ignition and radio are turned on, the CD will start
playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
3-44
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
2 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to repeat the
current track. RPT will appear on the display. Press this
pushbutton again to turn off repeat play.
3 INT (SCAN): Press this button to listen to the first
few seconds of each track on each CD inserted.
INTRO will appear on the display. To stop scanning
press this button again. The current track will begin
to play.
4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM will
appear on the display. Press this pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
TRACK (Previous/Next Track): Turn this knob one
notch to go to the start of the current track or to go to the
next track. The track number will appear on the
display. The player will continue moving backward or
forward through the CD with each turn of the knob.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
TUN (Forward/Reverse): Push and hold this knob to
fast forward or to reverse through the current track.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
AM/FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
• There may have been a problem while burning
CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening to
the radio. CDP will appear on the display when the CD
player has been selected.
Press this button while a CD is playing to pause the CD.
Track and the track number will flash on the display.
Press this button again to start playing the CD.
X (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. The only
way a CD can be ejected from the player is by pressing
the eject button. The CD will not eject when the
ignition or the radio is turned off.
and try again.
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-45
Radio with CD (Single Display, MP3)
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),
can be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM/FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
Playing the Radio
ON/OFF: Press this knob to turn the system on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
for longer than two seconds. The pushbutton number
will flash on the display when the station has been
set. Whenever that numbered pushbutton is pressed,
the station that was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Finding a Station
Automatic Store
AM/FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show the selection.
Six FM1 preset stations with the strongest reception in
the region can be automatically stored. Press the
AST button for longer than one second. Once the
stations are stored, the radio will switch to FM1 and
the first preset station will begin to play. FM-A will
appear on the display when listening to the automatic
stored stations. Press the AM-FM button to cancel
automatic store.
TUN (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
SCAN: Push and release this knob to scan radio
stations. The radio will go to a station, play for a
few seconds, then go on to the next station.
Push this knob again to stop scanning.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-46
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
SOUND (Bass/Treble): Press this button until BAS
appears on the display. Turn the volume knob to
increase or to decrease the bass. The display will show
the bass level. When finished making the selection,
press this button to select the bass level.
SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, press this button
until BAL appears on the display. Turn the volume
knob to increase or to decrease. The display will show
the balance level. When finished making the selection,
press this button to select the balance level.
Press this button until TRE appears on the display.
Turn the volume knob to increase or to decrease the
treble. The display will show the treble level. When
finished making the selection, press this button to select
the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
SOUND (Equalization): Press this button until EQ OFF
appears on the display to select customized equalization
settings designed for classic, pop, rock, jazz, and voice.
Turn the volume knob until the desired equalization
setting appears on the display. When finished making
the selection, press the SOUND button to select
the equalization setting.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this button until FAD appears on the
display. Turn the volume knob to increase or to
decrease the fade between the front and the rear
speakers. The display will show the fade level. When
finished making the selection, press this button to select
the fade level.
To cancel an equalization setting, press the SOUND
button until EQ OFF appears on the display, turn
the volume knob until OFF appears on the display,
then press the SOUND button again to select the
equalization setting.
3-47
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in and the CD should begin
playing. You can insert a CD with the ignition off.
When the CD is inserted, CDP will appear on the
display. As the CD is loading Filecheck will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, Track and
the track number will appear on the display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When a CD is in
the player and the ignition is turned on, the radio must
be turned on before the CD will start playback. When
the ignition and radio are turned on, the CD will
start playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
3-48
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD is
soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-72 for more
information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
2 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to repeat the
current track. RPT will appear on the display. Press this
pushbutton again to turn off repeat play.
TUN (Forward/Reverse): Turn this knob and wait
momentarily for the system to fast forward or to reverse
through the current track.
3 INT (Scan): Press this button to listen to the first
few seconds of each track on each loaded CD.
INTRO will appear on the display. To stop scanning
press this button again. The current track will begin
to play.
AM/FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM will
appear on the display. Press this pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
TRACK (Previous/Next Track): Turn this knob one
notch to go to the start of the current track or to go to the
next track. The track number will appear on the
display. The player will continue moving backward or
forward through the CD with each turn of the knob.
CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening to
the radio. CDP will appear on the display when the CD
player has been selected. The CD symbol will appear
on the display when a CD is loaded.
Press this button while a CD is playing to pause the CD.
Track and the track number will flash on the display.
Press this button again to start playing the CD.
X (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. The only
way a CD can be ejected from the player is by pressing
the eject button. The CD will not eject when the
ignition or the radio is turned off.
3-49
Using an MP3 CD
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
• Make sure playlists have a.m3u or.wpl extension,
other file extensions may not work.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
will be available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an
MP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually
better to burn the disc all at once.
3-50
The player will be able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.
Long file names, folder names, or playlist names
may use more disc memory space than necessary.
To conserve space on the disc, minimize the length of
the file, folder or playlist names. You can also play
an MP3 CD that was recorded using no file folders.
The system can support up to 11 folders in depth,
though, keep the depth of the folders to a minimum in
order to keep down the complexity and confusion
in trying to locate a particular folder during playback.
If a CD contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files the player will
let you access and navigate up to the maximum,
but all items over the maximum will be ignored.
Root Directory
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory will be accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) will always
be accessed before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
Order of Play
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
Tracks will be played in the following order:
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
will be located under the root folder. The next and
previous folder functions will have no function on
a CD that was recorded without folders or playlists.
When displaying the name of the folder the radio will
display ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be located under
the root folder. The folder down and the folder up
buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to the
root folder. When the radio displays the name of the
folder the radio will display ROOT.
• Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has been played, play will continue from the first
track of the first playlist.
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play will
begin from the first track under the root directory.
When all tracks from the root directory have been
played, play will continue from files according to their
numerical listing. After playing the last track from the
last folder, play will begin again at the first track of
the first folder or root directory.
File System and Naming
The song name that will be displayed will be the song
name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is
not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio will display the
file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or 4 pages
will be shortened. The display will not show parts
of words on the last page of text and the extension of
the filename will not be displayed.
3-51
Preprogrammed Playlists
You can access preprogrammed playlists which
were created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have editing
capability. These playlists will be treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
Playing an MP3
With the ignition on, insert a CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull it in, Loading, then
Filecheck, then MP3 will appear on the display.
The CD should begin playing. You can insert a CD with
the ignition off.
As each new track starts to play, F001, the track
number, and the song name will appear on the display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When a CD is in
the player and the ignition is turned on, the radio must
be turned on before the CD will start playback.
When the ignition and radio are turned on, the CD will
start playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
3-52
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the CD will not play properly. If the surface of the
CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-72 for
more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
CD Messages
All of the CD functions work the same while playing an
MP3, except for those listed here. See “Playing a
CD” earlier for more information.
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
5 DN (Down): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous directory.
6 UP: Press this pushbutton to go to the next directory.
TRACK (Previous/Next File): Turn this knob one notch
to go to the first track in the previous or to go to the next
folder. The player will continue moving backward or
forward through the CD with each turn of the knob.
DIR (Directory): Press and release this button to repeat
the tracks in the current directory. DIR will appear on
the display.
Press and release this button twice to repeat the tracks
in all of the directories. ALL will appear on the display.
Press and release this button again to turn off
repeat play.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• The format of the CD may not be compatible.
See “MP3 Format” earlier in this section.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-53
Radio with CD
(Double Display, MP3/WMA)
Finding a Station
AM: Press this button to switch to an AM station.
The display will show the selection.
FM: Press this button to switch to an FM station.
The display will show the selection.
( ) TUNE:
Press this button to select radio
stations.
Press the up arrows to increase or the down arrows to
decrease the radio frequencies.
¦ ¥ SEEK:
Press this button to seek radio stations.
Press the up arrows to seek the next radio station
or the down arrows to seek the previous radio station.
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press and release this knob to
turn the system on and off.
Turn the power/volume knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume.
Press this button for longer than two seconds to
mute the system.
3-54
SCAN/AST: Press this button to scan radio stations.
The radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds,
then go on to the next station. Press this button again to
stop scanning.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Automatic Store
Press this button for longer than two seconds to use
Automatic Store.
FM1’s six preset stations with the strongest station in
the region can be automatically stored. The display will
show AUTO SCANNING and SCANNING will flash
on display.
Stored stations will flash for a short time on display in
sequence. Once the stations are stored, the radio
will switch to FM1 and the first preset station will
begin to play. FM-A will appear on the display when
listening to the automatic stored stations. Press the AM,
FM button to cancel automatic store.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 24 stations (six FM1, six FM2, six AM1, and
six AM2), can be programmed on the six numbered
buttons, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the AM or FM button to select FM1, FM2,
AM1 or AM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for
longer than two seconds. The preset button number
one through six will flash on the display when the
station has been set. Whenever that numbered
preset button is pressed, the memorized station
will return.
5. Repeat the upper four steps for each preset button.
Order of Sound Function
The order for sound function is BASS, TRE, BAL,
FADE, EQ OFF, and VOL.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
SOUND (Bass/Treble): Press this button until BAS
appears on the display. Turn the volume knob to
increase or to decrease the bass. The display will show
the bass level. When finished making the selection,
press this button to set the bass level selection.
Press this button until TRE appears on the display.
Turn the volume knob to increase or to decrease
the treble. The display will show the treble level.
When finished making the selection, press this button
to set the treble level selection. If a station is weak
or noisy, decrease the treble.
3-55
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Setting the Equalization
SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, press this button
until BAL appears on the display. Turn the volume
knob to increase or to decrease. The display will show
the balance level. When finished making the selection,
press this button to set the balance level.
The order for customized equalization settings are
EQ OFF, CLASSIC, DANCE, ROCK, JAZZ, POP,
VOICE, TECHNO, EQ OFF.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this button until FAD appears on the
display. Turn the volume knob to increase or to
decrease the fade between the front and the rear
speakers. The display will show the fade level.
When finished making the selection, press this button
to set the fade level.
3-56
SOUND (Equalization): Press this button until EQ OFF
appears on the display to select customized equalization
settings designed for classic, dance, rock, jazz, pop,
voice and techno. Turn the volume knob until the
desired equalization setting appears on the display.
When finished making the selection, press the SOUND
button to set the equalization setting.
To cancel an equalization setting, press the SOUND
button until EQ OFF appears on the display, turn the
volume knob until OFF appears on the display,
then press the SOUND button again to set the
equalization setting.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in and the CD should begin
playing. You can insert a CD with the ignition off.
When the CD is inserted, CDP will appear on the
display. As the CD is loading Filecheck will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, Track and
the track number will appear on the display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When a CD is in
the player and the ignition is turned on, the radio
must be turned on before the CD will start playback.
When the ignition and radio are turned on, the CD will
start playing where it stopped, if it was the last
selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD is
soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-72 for more
information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-57
2 RPT (Repeat): Press this button to repeat the current
track. RPT will appear on the display. Press this
button again to turn off repeat play.
FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD
is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely inside
the radio for future listening.
3 RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the tracks
in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM will
appear on the display. Press this button again to turn off
random play.
CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening to
the radio. CDP will appear on the display when the CD
player has been selected. The CD symbol will appear
on the display when a CD is loaded.
4 INT (Scan): Press this button to listen to the first
few seconds of each track on each loaded CD.
INTRO will appear on the display. To stop scanning
press this button again. The current track will begin
to play.
Press this button while a CD is playing to pause the
CD. PAUSE will flash on the display. Press this button
again to start playing the CD.
( ) TUNE (Previous/Next Track):
Press the down
arrows to go to the start of the current track or press
the up arrows to go to the next track. The track number
will appear on the display. The player will continue
moving backward or forward through the CD with each
press of the up or down arrows.
AM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD
is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely inside
the radio for future listening.
3-58
EJECT: Press this button to eject a CD. The only way
a CD can be ejected from the player is by pressing
the eject button. The CD can eject when the ignition or
the radio is turned off.
Using an MP3 CD
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.
• Make sure each MP3/WMA file has a.m3u or.wma
extension, other file extensions may not work.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
will be available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
The player will be able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 5 sessions, and 999 files. Long file names
and folder names may use more disc memory space
than necessary. To conserve space on the disc,
minimize the length of the file and folder names.
You can also play an MP3/WMA CD that was recorded
using no file folders. The system can support up to
8 folders in depth, though, keep the depth of the folders
to a minimum in order to keep down the complexity
and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during
playback. If a CD contains more than the maximum of
50 folders, 5 sessions, and 999 files the player will
let you access and navigate up to the maximum, but all
items over the maximum will be ignored.
Root Directory
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
will be displayed as ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory will be accessed prior to
any other directory.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an
MP3/WMA disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually
better to burn the disc all at once.
3-59
Empty Directory or Folder
Order of Play
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
Tracks will be played in the following order:
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
will be located under the root folder. The next and
previous folder functions will have no function on a
CD that was recorded without folders or playlists.
When displaying the name of the folder the radio will
display ROOT.
When the CD contains only compressed audio files,
but no folders, all files will be located under the
root folder. When the radio displays the name of the
folder, the radio will display ROOT.
3-60
• Playback will begin from the first track under the
root directory.
• When all tracks from the root directory have been
played, playback will continue from files, according
to their numerical listing.
• After playing the last track from the last folder,
the player will begin playing again at the first track of
the first folder or root directory.
File System and Naming
The song name in the ID3 tag will be displayed. If the
song name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the
radio will display the file name without the extension
(such as MP3/WMA) instead.
Track names longer than 32 characters or 4 pages
will be shortened. The display will not show parts
of words on the last page of text and the extension
of the filename will not be displayed.
Playing an MP3/WMA
With the ignition on, insert a CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull it in, Loading, then
Filecheck, and then MP3 or WMA will appear on
the display. The CD should begin playing. You cannot
insert a CD with the ACC off.
As each new track starts to play, the track number,
and the song name will appear on the display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When a CD is in
the player and the ignition is turned on, the radio must
be turned on before the CD will start playback. When
the ignition and radio are turned on, the CD will
start playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD is
soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-72 for more
information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
All of the CD functions work the same while playing an
MP3/WMA, except for those listed here. See “Playing
a CD” earlier for more information.
SCROLL (MP3/WMA Mode Only): Press the SOUND
button for longer than two seconds. The song title or
other available information of a song will scroll on/off.
The offset is scroll on. The scroll mode can be changed
only when the SOUND button is pressed for longer
than two seconds.
3-61
DIR (Directory): Press this button to repeat the tracks
in the current directory. DIR will appear on the display.
CD Messages
Press this button again to repeat the tracks in all of
the directories. ALL will appear on the display.
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
Press this button again to turn off repeat play.
¦ ¥ SEEK (Previous/Next Folder) (in MP3/WMA
Mode): Press the up or down arrows to change
the folder. If CD-R don’t have any folder, “ROOT” will
flash on display for a short time.
( ) TUNE (Previous/Next Track): Press the
down arrows to go to the start of the current track or press
the up arrows to go to the next track. The track number
will appear on the display. The player will continue
moving backward or forward through the CD with each
press of the up or down arrows.
INFO/DISP (Information/Display): Press this button to
display additional text information related to the current
MP3/WMA song. A choice of additional information such
as: Song Title, Album Title, and Artist. Bit rate may also
appear on display.
When information is not available, No Info will appear on
the display.
Press this button for longer than two seconds to change
display mode.
3-62
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• The format of the CD may not be compatible.
See “MP3 Format” earlier in this section.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
Radio with Six-Disc CD
(Double Display, MP3/WMA)
Finding a Station
AM: Press this button to switch to an AM station.
The display will show the selection.
FM: Press this button to switch to an FM station.
The display will show the selection.
( ) TUNE:
Press this button to select radio
stations.
Press the up arrows to increase or the down arrows to
decrease the radio frequencies.
¦ ¥ SEEK:
Press this button to seek radio stations.
Press the up arrows to seek the next radio station
or the down arrows to seek the previous radio station.
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press and release this knob to
turn the system on and off.
SCAN/AST: Press this button to scan radio stations.
The radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds,
then go on to the next station. Press this button again to
stop scanning.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Turn the power/volume knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume.
Press this button for longer than two seconds to
mute the system.
3-63
Automatic Store
Press this button for longer than two seconds to use
Automatic Store.
FM1’s six preset stations with the strongest station in
the region can be automatically stored. The display will
show AUTO SCANNING and SCANNING will flash
on display.
Stored stations will flash for a short time on display in
sequence. Once the stations are stored, the radio will
switch to FM1 and the first preset station will begin to
play. FM-A will appear on the display when listening to
the automatic stored stations. Press the AM, FM button
to cancel automatic store.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 24 stations (six FM1, six FM2, six AM1, and
six AM2), can be programmed on the six numbered
buttons, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the AM or FM button to select FM1, FM2,
AM1 or AM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
3-64
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for
longer than two seconds. The preset button number
one through six will flash on the display when the
station has been set. Whenever that numbered
preset button is pressed, the memorized station
will return.
5. Repeat the upper four steps for each preset button.
Order of Sound Function
The order for sound function is BASS, TRE, BAL,
FADE, EQ OFF, and VOL.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
SOUND (Bass/Treble): Press this button until BAS
appears on the display. Turn the volume knob to
increase or to decrease the bass. The display will show
the bass level. When finished making the selection,
press this button to set the bass level.
Press this button until TRE appears on the display.
Turn the volume knob to increase or to decrease
the treble. The display will show the treble level.
When finished making the selection, press this button
to set the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy,
decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Setting the Equalization
SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, press this button
until BAL appears on the display. Turn the volume
knob to increase or to decrease. The display will show
the balance level. When finished making the selection,
press this button to set the balance level.
The order for customized equalization settings are
EQ OFF, CLASSIC, DANCE, ROCK, JAZZ, POP,
VOICE, TECHNO, EQ OFF.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this button until FAD appears on the
display. Turn the volume knob to increase or to
decrease the fade between the front and the rear
speakers. The display will show the fade level.
When finished making the selection, press this button
to set the fade level.
SOUND (Equalization): Press this button until EQ OFF
appears on the display to select customized equalization
settings designed for classic, dance, rock, jazz, pop,
voice and techno. Turn the volume knob until the
desired equalization setting appears on the display.
When finished making the selection, press the SOUND
button to set the equalization setting.
To cancel an equalization setting, press the SOUND
button until EQ OFF appears on the display, turn
the volume knob until OFF appears on the display,
then press the SOUND button again to set the
equalization setting.
3-65
Playing a CD(s)
LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
1. Press and release the load button. A message to
select a slot number from 1-6 will appear on
display.
2. Press the desired slot number. Wait for the
message to insert the disc.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the load button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and a message to load
multiple discs will be displayed.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
3. Press the LOAD button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
As each CD is inserted, CDP will appear on the display
and as each CD is loading Filecheck will appear on
the display.
Once playback begins, the track and track number will
appear on the display.
3-66
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When a CD is in
the player and the ignition is turned on, the radio must
be turned on before the current CD will start playback.
When the ignition and radio are turned on, the CD
will start playing where it stopped, if it was the
last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the CD will not play properly. If the surface of the
CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-72 for
more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top
of the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
2 RPT (Repeat): Press this button to repeat the current
track. RPT will appear on the display. Press this
button again to turn off repeat play.
3 RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the tracks
in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM will
appear on the display.
To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press this button until a
message that all discs are randomized is displayed.
Press the same button again to turn off random play.
4 INT (Scan): Press this button to listen to the first
few seconds of each track on each loaded CD. INTRO
will appear on the display. To stop scanning press
this button again. The current track will begin to play.
5 CDC − (Previous CDC): Press this button to go back
to the start of the previous CDC.
6 CDC + (Next CDC): Press this button to go forward
to the start of the next CDC.
( ) TUNE (Previous/Next Track):
Press the down
arrows to go to the start of the current track or press
the up arrows to go to the next track. The track number
will appear on the display. The player will continue
moving backward or forward through the CD with each
press of the up or down arrows.
AM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD
is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely inside
the radio for future listening.
FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD
is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely inside
the radio for future listening.
CDC: Press this button to play a CD when listening to
the radio. CDP will appear on the display when the
CD player has been selected. The CD symbol will
appear on the display when a CD is loaded.
Press this button while a CD is playing to pause the
CD. PAUSE will flash on the display. Press this button
again to start playing the CD.
EJECT: Press this button to eject the CD. Press and
hold this button to eject all CDs. The only way a CD can
be ejected from the player is by pressing the eject
button. The CD can eject when the ignition or the radio
is turned off.
3-67
Using an MP3 CD
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.
• Make sure each MP3/WMA file has a.m3u or.wma
extension, other file extensions may not work.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
will be available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an
MP3/WMA disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually
better to burn the disc all at once.
3-68
The player will be able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 5 sessions, and 999 files. Long file names,
folder names may use more disc memory space
than necessary. To conserve space on the disc,
minimize the length of the file, folder names. You can
also play an MP3/WMA CD that was recorded using no
file folders. The system can support up to 8 folders in
depth, though, keep the depth of the folders to a
minimum in order to keep down the complexity and
confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during
playback. If a CD contains more than the maximum of
50 folders, 5 sessions, and 999 files the player will
let you access and navigate up to the maximum, but all
items over the maximum will be ignored.
Root Directory
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
will be displayed as ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory will be accessed prior to
any other directory.
Empty Directory or Folder
Order of Play
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
Tracks will be played in the following order:
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
will be located under the root folder. The next and
previous folder functions will have no function on a
CD that was recorded without folders or playlists.
When displaying the name of the folder the radio will
display ROOT.
When the CD contains only compressed audio files,
but no folders, all files will be located under the
root folder. When the radio displays the name of the
folder, the radio will display ROOT.
• Playback will begin from the first track under the
root directory.
• When all tracks from the root directory have been
played, playback will continue from files, according
to their numerical listing.
• After playing the last track from the last folder,
the player will begin playing again at the first track
of the first folder or root directory.
File System and Naming
The song name in the ID3 tag will be displayed. If the
song name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the
radio will display the file name without the extension
(such as MP3/WMA) instead.
Track names longer than 32 characters or 4 pages
will be shortened. The display will not show parts
of words on the last page of text and the extension
of the filename will not be displayed.
3-69
Playing an MP3/WMA
With the ignition on, insert a CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull it in, Loading, then
Filecheck, and then MP3 or WMA will appear on
the display. The CD should begin playing. You cannot
insert a CD with the ACC off.
As each new track starts to play, the track number, and
the song name will appear on the display.
the CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD is
soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-72 for more
information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When a CD is in
the player and the ignition is turned on, the radio
must be turned on before the CD will start playback.
When the ignition and radio are turned on, the CD will
start playing where it stopped, if it was the last
selected audio source.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
3-70
All of the CD functions work the same while playing an
MP3WMA, except for those listed here. See “Playing
a CD” earlier for more information.
SCROLL (MP3/WMA Mode Only): Press the SOUND
button for longer than two seconds. The song title
and other available information of the song will scroll
on/off. The offset is scroll on. The scroll mode can
be changed only when the SOUND button is pressed
for longer than two seconds.
1 DIR (Directory): Press this button to repeat the
tracks in the current directory. DIR will appear on
the display.
Press this button again to repeat the tracks in all of
the directories. ALL will appear on the display.
Press this button again to turn off repeat play.
¦¥ SEEK (Previous/Next Folder) (in MP3/WMA
Mode): Press the up or down arrows to change
the folder. If CD-R don’t have any folder, “ROOT” will
flash on display for a short time.
() TUNE (Previous/Next Track): Press the
down arrows to go to the start of the current track or
press the up arrows to go to the next track. The
track number will appear on the display. The player will
continue moving backward or forward through the
CD with each press of the up or down arrows.
INFO/DISP (Information/Display): Press this button to
display additional text information related to the
current MP3/WMA song. A choice of additional
information such as: Song Title, Album Title, and Artist.
Bit rate may also appear on display.
When information is not available, No Info will appear
on the display.
Press this button for longer than two seconds to change
display mode.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• The format of the CD may not be compatible.
See “MP3 Format” earlier in this section.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-71
Radio Reception
Care of Your CDs
You may experience frequency interference and static
during normal radio reception if items such as cellphone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom
surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will
not play properly or not at all. If the surface of a CD is
soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean,
soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
starts from the center to the edge.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other.
For better radio reception, most AM radio stations will
boost the power levels during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static can also occur
when things like storms and power lines interfere with
radio reception. When this happens, try reducing
the treble on your radio.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
3-72
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it;
this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
Care of the CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the internal
lens of the CD optics with lubricants.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever become
slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the mast is
badly bent, replace it.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the antenna base located on the roof of the
vehicle. If tightening is required, tighten by hand.
Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched
and that the lines on the glass are not damaged.
If the inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with
radio reception. Also, for proper radio reception, the
antenna connector at the top-center of the rear window
needs to be properly attached to the post on the glass.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear window
antenna and/or the rear window defogger. Repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not clear
the inside rear window with sharp objects.
Because this antenna is built into your rear window,
there is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes
and vandals.
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear window
defogger is turned on, it could mean that a defogger
grid line has been damaged. If this is true, the grid line
must be repaired.
If you choose to add a cellular telephone to your
vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to the
glass, make sure that you do not damage the grid lines
for the AM-FM antenna. There is enough space between
the lines to attach a cellular telephone antenna without
interfering with radio reception.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
3-73
✍ NOTES
3-74
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-6
Braking .........................................................4-6
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-7
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-8
Steering ........................................................4-9
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-11
Passing .......................................................4-12
Loss of Control .............................................4-13
Driving at Night ............................................4-14
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-16
City Driving ..................................................4-18
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-19
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-20
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-21
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-22
Winter Driving ..............................................4-24
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow ..............................................4-28
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-28
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-29
Towing ..........................................................4-33
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-33
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-33
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-35
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-12.
4-2
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready for
anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or
expressways, it means “Always expect the
unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other
drivers are going to be careless and make
mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and
be ready. Rear-end collisions are about the
most preventable of accidents. Yet they are
common. Allow enough following distance.
Defensive driving requires that a driver
concentrate on the driving task. Anything that
distracts from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a
passenger to help do these things, or pull off
the road in a safe place to do them. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological, and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive. But what if people do? How much is
“too much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less than
many might think. Although it depends on each person
and situation, here is some general information on
the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
4-3
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The BAC
limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is
0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night.
All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being
in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have
a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC
level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance
of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,
the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times
greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is
25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has
been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,
that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if the person had not been
drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice,
it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the
tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-27.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
4-6
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle may have the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that will
help prevent a braking skid.
If your vehicle has ABS,
this warning light on the
instrument panel will come
on briefly when you
start your vehicle.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
4-7
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle
in front of you, you will not have time to apply your
brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though
you have ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
4-8
If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at the same
time. However, if you do not have ABS, your first
reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and hold it
down — may be the wrong thing to do. Your wheels can
stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle cannot respond
to your steering. Momentum will carry it in whatever
direction it was headed when the wheels stopped
rolling. That could be off the road, into the very thing
you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.
Steering Tips
If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” braking
technique. This will give you maximum braking while
maintaining steering control. You can do this by pushing
on the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or
feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.
This will help you retain steering control. If you do have
ABS, it is different. See Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) on page 4-7.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
you will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you are
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Unless you
have four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard
braking can demand too much of those places.
You can lose control.
4-9
The same thing can happen if you are steering
through a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate.
Those two control systems — steering and
acceleration — can overwhelm those places where
the tires meet the road and make you lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust
your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are based on
good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable
conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-10
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes — but, unless you
have anti-lock brakes, not enough to lock your wheels.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as
much speed as you can from a possible collision.
Then steer around the problem, to the left or right
depending on the space available.
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.
4-11
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides and
to crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a
better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-12
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a running start that more than makes up
for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
•
•
•
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in
your inside mirror, activate your right lane change
signal and move back into the right lane. Remember
that your passenger side outside mirror is convex.
The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing,
it may be slowing down or starting to turn.
If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer and
constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
4-13
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear.
Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do
not have ABS, then in a braking skid, where the wheels
are no longer rolling, release enough pressure on the
brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This restores
steering control. Push the brake pedal down steadily
when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels
are rolling, you will have steering control.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare
from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so much
road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
4-14
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even
several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark.
When you are faced with severe glare, as from a
driver who does not lower the high beams, or a
vehicle with misaimed headlamps, slow down a little.
Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer
from night blindness — the inability to see in dim
light — and are not even aware of it.
4-15
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
And, if your tires do not have much tread left, you will
get even less traction. It is always wise to go slower and
be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.
The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes
are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when
strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads.
4-16
Hydroplaning
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before
you hit them.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
4-17
Driving Through Flowing Water
City Driving
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle
can be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
•
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See Tires on page 5-47.
4-18
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Freeway Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-19.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
4-19
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
4-20
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you will find experienced and able service experts
in GM dealerships all across North America. They will
be ready and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to
the recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on
the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of
the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.
Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle
can leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-21
Hill and Mountain Roads
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-22
• Know how to go uphill. Drive in the highest gear
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
possible.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could
be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an
accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area,
or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
4-23
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
Also see Tires on page 5-47.
4-24
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You will
have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
you will want to brake very gently, too. If you do
have ABS, see Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on
page 4-7. This system improves your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Whether you have ABS or not, you will want to begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.
Without ABS, if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let
up on the brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down
steadily to get the most traction you can.
4-25
Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake so hard
that your wheels stop rolling, you will just slide. Brake
so your wheels always keep rolling and you can
still steer.
• Whatever your braking system, allow greater
following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice.
On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may
appear in shaded areas where the sun cannot
reach, such as around clumps of trees, behind
buildings, or under bridges. Sometimes the surface
of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when
the surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch
of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it.
Try not to brake while you are actually on the ice,
and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
Here are some things to do to summon help and keep
yourself and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are
near help and you can hike through the snow.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-26
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get
and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can.
To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and
do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or
so until help comes.
4-27
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to spin
your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking can
help you get out when you are stuck, but you must
use caution.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-28.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-60.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle
can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you
are stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible.
Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h)
as shown on the speedometer.
4-28
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift
back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear, or with a manual transaxle, between FIRST (1) or
SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while
you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your
wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you
will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle.
If that does not get you out after a few tries, you
may need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed
out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Loading Your Vehicle
Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight or maximum load amount and
includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all
nonfactory-installed options. Two labels on your
vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry,
the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific tire and loading information label is
attached to the driver’s side, center pillar (B-pillar).
This label shows the vehicle’s maximum load amount,
the number of occupant seating positions, the original
equipment tires, and the recommended cold tire inflation
pressure. For more information on tires and inflation
see Tires on page 5-47 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-53.
4-29
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see “Certification
Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the “Maximum Load” amount on the tire and
loading information label.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from the “Maximum Load” amount.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the
“Maximum Load” amount equals 1400 lbs (635 kg)
and there will be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
Do not use your vehicle to tow a trailer. The vehicle is not
designed or intended for such a use. Towing a trailer can
adversely affect handling, durability and fuel economy.
4-30
Example 1
Item
Description
Total
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
or Maximum Load,
for Example 1 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
300 lbs (136 kg)
C
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
700 lbs (317 kg)
Example 3
Example 2
Item
Description
Total
Item
Description
Total
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
or Maximum Load
for Example 2 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
or Maximum Load
for Example 3 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
C
Available Cargo Weight =
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Available Cargo Weight =
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s maximum
load and seating positions. The combined weight of the
driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed
your vehicle’s maximum load weight.
4-31
Certification Label
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it
out. Do not carry more than 79 lbs (36 kg) in the trunk.
{CAUTION:
Label Example
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to the
center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s door latch.
This label tells you the gross weight capacity of
your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel, and cargo. Never exceed the GVWR
for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
4-32
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service
if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle, such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
4-33
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you
will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to
be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip
on page 4-20.
4-34
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” that follows
for more information.
Dolly Towing
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear with the
front wheels on the ground could cause transaxle
damage. Do not tow the vehicle from the rear
with the front wheels on the road.
Towing a Trailer
Do not use your vehicle to tow a trailer. The vehicle is
not designed or intended for such a use. Towing a
trailer can adversely affect handling, durability and
fuel economy.
Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Turn the ignition to ACC.
3. Put the vehicle in NEUTRAL (N).
4. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
5. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position.
6. Release the parking brake.
4-35
✍ NOTES
4-36
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ..............................................5-4
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-5
Additives .......................................................5-5
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-6
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-10
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-14
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-17
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..............................5-19
Manual Transaxle Fluid ..................................5-21
Hydraulic Clutch ...........................................5-21
Engine Coolant .............................................5-22
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-24
Engine Overheating .......................................5-24
Cooling System ............................................5-26
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-31
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-32
Brakes ........................................................5-33
Battery ........................................................5-36
Jump Starting ...............................................5-37
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-41
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-41
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-41
Headlamps ..................................................5-42
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ................5-43
Turn Signal Lamps (Side) ..............................5-44
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps .........................................5-45
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-45
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-46
Tires ..............................................................5-47
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-48
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-50
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-53
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-54
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-56
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Buying New Tires .........................................5-56
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-57
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-58
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-59
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-59
Tire Chains ..................................................5-60
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-61
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-62
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-63
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................5-65
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-69
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-69
Appearance Care ............................................5-70
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-71
Vinyl ...........................................................5-72
Instrument Panel ..........................................5-73
Interior Plastic Components ............................5-73
Glass Surfaces .............................................5-73
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-73
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-73
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-74
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-74
5-2
Finish Care ..................................................5-74
Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-75
Aluminum Wheels .........................................5-76
Tires ...........................................................5-76
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-77
Finish Damage .............................................5-77
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-77
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-77
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-78
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-79
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-79
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-79
Electrical System ............................................5-80
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-80
Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-80
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-80
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-80
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-81
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........................5-81
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ....................5-83
Capacities and Specifications ..........................5-87
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........5-88
Service
Accessories and Modifications
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle they
can affect your vehicle’s performance and safety,
including such things as, braking, stability, ride and
handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability,
and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction
control and stability control. Some of these accessories
may even cause malfunction or damage not covered
by warranty.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your GM
dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer and
ask for GM Accessories, you will know that GM-trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine GM Accessories.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
5-4
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-14.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-68.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6-26.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
California Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-35. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs may not be covered by your warranty.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you may notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your
engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
General Motors recommends against the use of
gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-5
for additional information.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work properly.
In most cases, you should not have to add anything to
your fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
5-5
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, or if
your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors
or valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your GM dealer has
additives that will help correct and prevent most
deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area. General Motors recommends that you use
these gasolines if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol)
and other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must
not be used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
5-6
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
recommends against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel.
Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
To open the fuel filler door,
pull up on the release
lever with this symbol on it.
It is located on the floor
on the outboard side of the
driver’s seat.
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island. Turn off your engine when
you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle — this is against the law
in some places. Keep children away from the
fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
5-7
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
5-8
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-74.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until
it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-35.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the
right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and
may damage your fuel tank and emissions system.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-35.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-9
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
handle inside the
vehicle. It is located on
the lower left side of
the instrument panel.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up on the
secondary hood release lever, located under the
front center of the hood.
5-10
3. Lift the hood and release the hood prop from its
retainer located on the underside of the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the
inner fender and return the prop to its retainer. Lower the
hood 12 inches (30 cm) above the vehicle and release
it to latch fully. Check to make sure the hood is
closed and repeat the process if necessary.
4. Place the hood prop into the slot on the inner fender.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood, here is what you will see:
Automatic shown, Manual similar
5-12
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17.
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-14.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-14.
D. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
Brakes on page 5-33.
E. Automatic Transaxle Dipstick. See Automatic
Transaxle Fluid on page 5-19.
F. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-26.
G. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-83.
H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-31.
I. Battery. See Battery on page 5-36.
J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-32.
5-13
When to Add Engine Oil
Engine Oil
If the oil pressure light
appears on the instrument
cluster, it means you
need to check your engine
oil level right away.
For more information, see Oil Pressure Light on
page 3-38.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down and check the level.
5-14
If the oil is below the lower hole at the tip of the
dipstick (B), you will need to add at least one quart/liter
of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-87.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
hole (A) that shows the proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range, between the holes on the
dipstick. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you
are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
5-15
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
5-16
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city
maintenance schedule:
• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is
particularly important when outside temperatures
are below freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling, such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic.
• You frequently use a carrier on top of your vehicle.
• The vehicle is used for delivery service, police,
taxi, or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months — whichever
occurs first.
If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway
maintenance schedule. Change oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months — whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine
under highway conditions will cause engine oil to
break down slower.
What to Do with Used Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,
or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have
a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your
dealer, a service station, or a local recycling center
for help.
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
5-17
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the engine air cleaner/filter every 15,000 miles
(25 000 km) and replace it every 30,000 miles
(50 000 km). If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the engine air cleaner/filter remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
1. Remove the screws and lift off the cover.
2. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
3. Put the cover back on tightly and tighten the screws.
See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on
page 6-4 for replacement intervals.
5-18
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
When to Check Automatic Transaxle
Fluid
Check your automatic transaxle fluid level at least twice a
year. Add fluid if needed. See At Least Twice a Year on
page 6-18.
How to Check Automatic Transaxle
Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the
transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine or
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if you check the
transaxle fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:
• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 158°F to 176°F
(70°C to 80°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above
50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may
have to drive longer.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
5-19
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
How to Add Automatic Transaxle Fluid
The automatic transaxle dipstick is located toward the
front of the engine compartment, near the power
steering fluid reservoir. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-24.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag
or paper towel.
2. Push the dipstick back in all the way, wait
three seconds and then pull it back out again.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the area between the
two dimples in the hot range on the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be between the
two dimples in the hot range.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
5-20
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transaxle
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always use
the automatic transaxle fluid listed in Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-24.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
Manual Transaxle Fluid
How to Check and Add Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level.
A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealership
service department and have it repaired as soon as
possible. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-24 for the proper fluid to use.
Hydraulic Clutch
There is one reservoir for both the brake and the
hydraulic clutch fluid. See Brakes on page 5-33 for
more information.
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. The master cylinder reservoir is filled
with hydraulic fluid.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
When to Check and What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often you should check the fluid level in your master
cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid. See Part B:
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-18 and
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-24.
To check the fluid level, look on the side of the reservoir.
If the fluid reaches the MAX (A) mark on the reservoir,
the fluid level is correct. The reservoir is located near
the back of the engine compartment on the driver’s side
of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.
5-21
Engine Coolant
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-24.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and proper
coolant will:
•
•
•
•
•
Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
What to Use
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and coolant
that meets GM Specification 1825M, which will not
damage aluminum parts. You can also use a recycled
coolant conforming to GM Specification 1825M with a
complete coolant flush and refill. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
5-22
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and the proper coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives in
your vehicle’s cooling system, you could damage
your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture of the
engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling
system. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-24 for more information.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be between
the Maximum (A) and Minimum (B) marks on the
coolant surge tank. The level rises at engine
operation temperature and drops again when the
engine cools down.
The engine coolant surge tank is located in the rear of
the engine compartment on the driver’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more information on location.
5-23
Adding Coolant
Engine Overheating
If the level falls below the Minimum (B) mark, add the
proper coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when
the engine is cool. If the surge tank is empty, a
special fill procedure is necessary. See Cooling System
on page 5-26 for instructions on “How to Add Coolant
to the Coolant Surge Tank.”
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel cluster. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-28.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
5-24
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned.
Stop your engine if it overheats, and get
out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood, but to get service
help right away.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
5-25
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface. Make sure that
the air conditioning is turned off.
A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
5-26
The coolant level should be between the Minimum and
Maximum marks on the coolant surge tank when the
engine is cool. If it is not, you may have a leak at
the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses,
radiator, water pump, or somewhere else in the
cooling system.
{CAUTION:
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant.
That could cause an engine fire, and you could
be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fan is running.
If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running.
If it is not, your vehicle needs service.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not between the Minimum
and Maximum marks, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and proper coolant at the coolant surge
tank, but be sure the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you
do it. See Engine Coolant on page 5-22 for more
information.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
5-27
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and a proper coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-28
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper
radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure
cap slowly counterclockwise about two or
two and one-half turns.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will
allow any pressure still left to be vented out
the discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-29
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower than
the Maximum mark, add more of the proper mixture
to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches
the mark.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
See your dealer, if necessary.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture
to the Maximum mark on the coolant surge tank.
Wait about five minutes, then check to see if
the level is below the mark. If the level is below the
Maximum mark, add additional coolant to bring
the level up to the mark. Repeat this procedure until
the level remains constant at the Maximum mark
for at least five minutes.
5-30
Power Steering Fluid
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down.
The power steering fluid reservoir is located toward the
front of the engine compartment on the driver’s side
of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir location.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
The level should be between the MIN (B) and MAX (A)
marks on the reservoir. If the level drops below the
MIN (B) mark, add power steering fluid.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-24.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
5-31
Windshield Washer Fluid
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
5-32
Notice:
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your vehicle has one
reservoir for both the brake
and clutch hydraulic
systems. It is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake or clutch system. If it is,
you should have your brake/clutch system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later your brakes will not
work well, or will not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add
fluid when your linings are worn, then you will have
too much fluid when you get new brake linings.
You should add or remove brake fluid, as necessary,
only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
and/or clutch hydraulic system.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-27.
5-33
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-24.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
5-34
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-74.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and may have rear
drum brakes or rear disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes will not work well. That could lead
to an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
Also, the rear brake drums should be removed and
inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or
changing. When you have the front brake pads
replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See Brake System Inspection on page 6-23.
Brake Pedal Travel
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Every time you make a moderate brake stop, your disc
brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make a moderate or
heavier stop, then your brakes might not adjust correctly.
If you drive in that way, then — very carefully — make a
few moderate brake stops about every 1,000 miles
(1 600 km), so your brakes will adjust properly.
If you have rear drum brakes, they do not have wear
indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing
noise, have the rear brake linings inspected immediately.
If your brake pedal goes down farther than normal, your
rear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjust them by
backing up and firmly applying the brakes a few times.
5-35
Replacing Brake System Parts
Battery
The braking system on a vehicle is complex.
Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you need new ones put in — be sure you get
new approved GM replacement parts. If you do not,
your brakes may no longer work properly. For example,
if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for
your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear
brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change in
many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from the
battery. This will help keep your battery from running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-37
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
5-36
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
5-37
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. Your vehicle’s positive (+) terminal is
located under a red tethered cap on the battery.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
Flip the cap up to access the positive (+) terminal.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
5-38
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
5-39
9. Connect the other end
of the negative (−)
cable at least 18 inches
(45 cm) away from
the dead battery,
but not near engine
parts that move.
The electrical
connection is just as
good there, and
the chance of sparks
getting back to the
battery is much less.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (–) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-40
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
Bulb Replacement
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-45.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
Halogen Bulbs
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) terminal cap to its original
position.
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in an accident,
the headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to
the low-beam headlamps may be necessary if it is
difficult to see the lane markers (for horizontal aim), or if
oncoming drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at
you (for vertical aim).
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
If you believe your headlamps need to be re-aimed,
it is recommend that you take the vehicle to your
dealer for service.
5-41
Headlamps
5. Remove the headlamp assembly.
To replace a headlamp bulb, do the following:
6. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the
rear of the bulb.
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-10
for more information.
2. Remove the five screws from top of the radiator
grille.
3. Remove the radiator grille.
7. Remove the headlamp cap.
4. Remove the three bolts from the headlamp assembly.
5-42
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps
To replace a front turn signal or parking lamp bulb,
do the following:
1. Remove the radiator grille and the headlamp
assembly. See Steps 2 through 5 under Headlamps
on page 5-42 for instructions on how to remove
the headlamp assembly.
8. Release the spring that retains the bulb by loosing
the screw.
9. Remove the old bulb.
10. Install the new bulb.
11. Install the bulb retaining spring.
12. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to install the headlamp
assembly.
2. Turn the front turn signal bulb socket
counterclockwise.
3. Pull the front turn signal bulb socket out of the
lamp housing.
5-43
4. Press the bulb inward and turn it counterclockwise
to remove it from the bulb socket.
5. Install the new bulb into the socket by pressing it in
and turning it clockwise.
6. Install the socket into the lamp housing by turning it
clockwise.
7. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to install the assembly.
Turn Signal Lamps (Side)
To replace a side turn signal bulb, do the following:
1. Remove the radiator grille and the headlamp
assembly. See Steps 2 through 5 under Headlamps
on page 5-42 to access the side turn signal lamps.
2. Remove the side turn signal lamp assembly
by pulling it forward.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb from the lamp housing by pulling
the bulb straight out of the socket.
5. Install the new bulb into the bulb socket by pushing
it in and rotating the bulb socket clockwise.
6. Push the side turn signal lamp assembly back into
its original position.
5-44
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing the
bulb and turning it counterclockwise.
To replace a taillamp, stoplamp or back-up bulb, do the
following:
6. Replace the bulb socket into the lamp housing.
Twist the bulb socket clockwise to secure.
1. Open the trunk or liftgate. See Trunk (Sedan) on
page 2-9 or Liftgate (Hatchback) on page 2-11 for
more information.
5. Install the appropriate bulb into the socket.
7. Reverse Step 2 to reinstall the lamp housing.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
2. Remove the two screws and the lamp assembly.
Bulb Number
Back-Up
94535571
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
94535587
Headlamps
94535548
Front Parking/Turn Signal
94535574
Side Turn Signal
94535587
Stoplamp/Taillamps
94535574
Turn Signal Lamps
94535572
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer.
3. Remove the bulb socket by turning it
counterclockwise.
5-45
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Here is how to remove the Shepherd’s Hook type:
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See “Wiper Blade Check” under Part B:
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-18 for
more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways.
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
2. Press the retaining clip (A) and pull the wiper blade
off the arm.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
5-46
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner Manual.
{CAUTION:
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
•
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-29.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
•
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-53.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
(Continued)
5-47
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
car tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.
(B) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(E) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-58.
Passenger Car Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
5-48
(F) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-53 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the
tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto
both sides of the tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-69 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-69 and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-61.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-53.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
5-49
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger car tire size.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle
tire engineered to standards set by the U. S. Tire and
Rim Association.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and the speed rating of a tire. The load
range represents the load carry capacity a tire is
certified to carry. The speed rating is the maximum
speed a tire is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings
range from A to Z.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example,
if the tire size aspect ratio is 70, as shown in item C of
the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall
is 70% as high as it is wide.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
5-50
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from
driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-53.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehicle
with standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
5-51
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering,
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name
molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings
on the other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-56.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-53 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards):
A tire information system that provides consumers
with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and
treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 5-58.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus the
rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
5-52
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Premature or irregular wear
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-29. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
Poor handling
When to Check
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
•
•
•
•
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold. The recommended
cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
Unusual wear
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget
to check the compact spare tire, it should be at
60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information regarding
the compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-69.
Poor handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
5-53
How to Check
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no more than
1 mile (1.6 km).
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
5-54
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-56 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-59 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services on page 6-4.
{CAUTION:
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire
rotation.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-62.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the tire and loading
information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-29 for an example of the tire and loading
information label and where it is located on your vehicle.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-87.
5-55
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. If you need replacement tires, GM strongly
recommends that you get tires that are the same size,
brand, load range, speed rating, and construction
type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s
original tires. This way, your vehicle will continue to have
tires that are designed to give the same performance
and vehicle safety, during normal use, as the original
tires. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5-48 for
additional information.
{CAUTION:
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-56
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires),
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct size,
brand, and type of tires on all wheels. It is
all right to drive with your compact spare
temporarily, as it was developed for use on your
vehicle. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-69.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could
fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on
the Tire and Loading Information Label. This label
is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29, for more
information about the Tire and Loading Information
Label.
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, anti-lock brakes,
traction control, and electronic stability control, the
performance of these systems can be affected.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not recommended
for those wheels are selected. You may increase
the chance that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire
systems developed for your vehicle, and have
them properly installed by a GM certified
technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-56 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.
5-57
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
selection width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (11⁄2) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the Unites States National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear,
traction and temperature performance. (This applies
only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The grades
are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not
apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver
or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements.
5-58
Traction — AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature — A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if you
notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment may need to be
checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, your tires and wheels may
need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for proper
diagnosis.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
5-59
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or
wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-62 for more
information.
5-60
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
Notice: Use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install them
on the front tires and tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive
slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting
your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too
fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will
damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer.
Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-61
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
(Continued)
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transaxle shift lever in
PARK (P), or shift a manual transaxle to
FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
CAUTION:
5-62
CAUTION:
(Continued)
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
When you have a flat tire, use the following example as
a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The compact spare tire and tools you will need are
located in the trunk.
The following information will tell you how to use the
jack and change a tire.
A. Jack
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Jack Handle
D. Screwdriver
1. Open the trunk or liftgate. See Trunk (Sedan) on
page 2-9 or Liftgate (Hatchback) on page 2-11 for
more information.
2. Lift the trim cover.
5-63
3. Remove the foam tray.
4. Remove the jack, the jack handle and the wheel
wrench from the foam tray.
5-64
5. Turn the retainer counterclockwise and remove it
from the compact spare.
6. Remove the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-69 for more information.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. If your vehicle has wheel covers, loosen the four
plastic caps by hand or by using the wheel wrench.
The plastic nuts do not come off of the cover.
2. Remove the wheel cover using the flat end of the
jack handle or the screwdriver. Pry along the edge
of the wheel cover until it comes off.
Hatchback shown, Sedan similar
4. Locate the notch in the frame near each wheel
which the jack head fits in.
5. Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits
firmly into the notch in the vehicle’s frame nearest
the flat tire.
6. Put the compact spare tire near you.
3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Do not remove them yet.
5-65
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
7. Insert the jack handle into the jack and the wheel
wrench onto the end of the jack handle.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
5-66
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well.
9. Remove all of the wheel nuts by turning them
counterclockwise.
10. Remove the flat tire.
12. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get
all the rust or dirt off.
11. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
13. Install the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand
clockwise until the wheel is held against the hub.
14. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-67
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-87 for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
specification. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-87 for the wheel nut torque specification.
5-68
15. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare
tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover in the cargo
area until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
To store a flat or compact spare tire and tools, do the
following:
1. Store the flat tire or the compact spare in the
compact spare tire compartment.
2. Secure the retainer.
3. Store the tools securely in the foam tray and place
the tray back in the cargo area.
4. Replace the trim cover.
The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-69.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 50 mph
(80 km/h), so you can finish your trip and have your
full-size tire repaired or replaced where you want.
Of course, it is best to replace your spare with a full-size
tire as soon as you can. Your spare will last longer
and be in good shape in case you need it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Do not use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep your
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
5-69
Appearance Care
Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.
Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a match
is struck near them or if they get on a hot part of the
vehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaled
in an enclosed space. When anything from a container
is used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always open
the doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaning
the inside.
Never use these to clean the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
•
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
5-70
• Turpentine
• Lacquer Thinner
• Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage the vehicle, too.
Do not use any of these products unless this manual
says you can. In many uses, these will damage the
vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained from
your dealer.
Here are some cleaning tips:
•
•
•
•
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
• To avoid forming a ring on the fabric after spot
Most stains can be removed with club soda water.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth.
For solids: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum or brush.
2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft, white cloth.
Do not over-saturate; the cloth should not drip water.
3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabric
too wet.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or it
will set.
5-71
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. First, try the cleaner on an area of the fabric that is
not easily seen to make sure the cleaner does not
affect the color of the fabric.
2. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth.
For solids: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum or brush.
3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a clean
soft, white, cloth. Do not apply spray directly to
the fabric.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up with the
club soda water instructions given earlier in this
section.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, black coffee,
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine,
and blood can be removed using the club soda water
instructions given earlier in this section. If an odor lingers
after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a
water and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of
baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water.
Let dry.
Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with
an approved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the “Using Cleaner on
Fabric” instructions described earlier.
Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
This may have to be done more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt, and shoe polish will stain if
they are not removed quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
5-72
Instrument Panel
Care of Safety Belts
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Keep belts clean and dry.
Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Glass Surfaces
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass. When cleaning the glass on your vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Glass should be cleaned often. Your dealer can provide
an approved cleaner, or a liquid household glass
cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust
films on interior glass. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-78.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
5-73
Washing Your Vehicle
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-74.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer.
See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-78.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
5-74
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-78.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on
painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking
new, keep the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever
possible.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass cleaning
liquid or powder and water solution. The windshield is
clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-75
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
5-76
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your GM dealer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in
your GM dealer’s body and paint shop.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
5-77
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches and other light
surface contamination.
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Cleans, shines and
protects in one easy step,
no wiping necessary.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Spot Lifter
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
5-78
Vehicle Identification
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the inside of the glove box.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
On this label, you will find the following:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
•
•
•
•
VIN
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
5-79
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-68.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses, one for each
headlamp, in the fuse block. An electrical overload
will cause the lamps to turn off. If this happens,
have your headlamp wiring checked right away.
5-80
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the
current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed
or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
There are spare fuses provided in the engine
compartment fuse block. If you ever have a problem on
the road and do not have a spare fuse, you can borrow
one that has the same amperage. Just pick a feature of
your vehicle that you can get along without — like the
radio or cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the
correct amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the instrument
panel fuse block and the engine compartment fuse block.
There is a fuse puller located on the engine
compartment fuse block. It can be used to easily
remove fuses from the fuse block.
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the end of
the instrument panel on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To access the fuses, open the fuse panel door by
pulling the door out.
To reinstall the door, first insert the rear edge of the
fuse panel door, then push the front of the door into
the end of the instrument panel to secure it.
5-81
Fuses
LTR
Cigar Lighter
HORN,
REAR/FOG
Horn, Rear Fog Lamps
RADIO, CLK
Audio, Clock
STOP
Stop Lamp
TRN/SIG
Turn Signal
CLSTR,
HAZRD
Instrument Panel Cluster, Hazard
Flasher
CLSTR, CLK
Instrument Panel Cluster, Clock
DR/LCK
Door Lock, Remote Keyless Entry
BCK/UP
Back-Up Lamp
ECM, TCM
Engine Control Module,
Transmission Control Module
ECM, TCM
Engine Control Module,
Transmission Control Module
WPR, WSWA
DIS,
INJECTOR
5-82
Usage
Wiper, Washer
Direct Ignition System, Injector
Fuses
ENG FUSE
AIRBAG
HVAC
ABS
Usage
Engine Fuse
Airbag
HVAC Blower
Anti-lock Brake System
BLANK
Not Used
BLANK
Not Used
DIODE (ABS)
Anti-lock Brake System Diode
BLANK
Not Used
BLANK
Not Used
CLK, RADIO
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Clock, Audio
The engine compartment fuse block is located on
the driver’s side of the vehicle, near the battery.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location. To access the fuses,
pull out the top and bottom flaps to release the cover.
To reinstall the cover, push the cover until it is secure.
5-83
5-84
Fuses
Usage
HI BEAM RT
Passenger’s Side Headlamp High
DIODE (FOG)
Fog Lamp Diode
HI BEAM LT
BLANK
Driver’s Side Headlamp High
Not Used
LOW BEAM RT Passenger’s Side Headlamp Low
ILLUM RT
Parking Lamp Right Side,
Illumination Circuit
LOW BEAM LT Driver’s Side Headlamp Low
ILLUM LT
Parking Lamp Left Side,
License Plate Lamp
Fuses
HEAD LAMPS
Headlamps
FUEL
Fuel Pump
A/C
FOG LAMPS
HVAC
BLOWER
ABS
I/P FUSE
BATT.
COOL FAN
INT LTS
Room Lamp
BLANK
Not Used
BLANK
DEFOG
Defogger
IGN 1
S/ROOF
Sunroof
ILLUM LAMPS Illumination Relay
HORN
Usage
IGN 2
PWR WNDW
SPARE
Air Conditioning Compressor
Front Fog Lamp
Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning
Blower
Anti-lock Brake System
Instrument Panel Fuse Box
Radiator Fan
Ignition 2
Blank
Ignition 1
Power Windows
Spare
Horn
5-85
Relays
BLANK
Usage
Not Used
Relays
COOL FN
CNTRL
COOL FAN
LOW
Cooling Fan Low
HEAD
LAMPS HI
Headlamp High
A/C
COMPRSR
HEAD
LAMPS LOW
Headlamp Low
COOL
FAN HI
PWR WNDW
Power Window
FRT FOG
5-86
Fog Lamp
FUEL PUMP
Usage
Cooling Fan Control
Fuel Pump
Air Conditioning Compressor
Cooling Fan High
ILLUM LAMPS Illumination Lamps
BLANK
Not Used
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-24 for more information.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
1.48 lbs
0.67 kg
Cooling System
6.3 qt
6.0 L
Engine Oil with Filter
3.96 qt
3.75 L
Fuel Tank
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
11.9 gal
45.0 L
Transaxle, Automatic
6.2 qt
5.87 L
Transaxle, Manual
1.9 qt
1.8 L
Wheel Nut Torque
81 lb ft
110 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
1.6L L4 (L91)
VIN Code
Transaxle
Spark Plug Gap
6
Automatic and
Manual
0.039-0.043 inch (1.0-1.1 mm)
5-87
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part
Number
A/C Filter
96539649
—
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
96536694
—
Engine Oil Filter
96395221
—
Fuel Filter
96537170
—
Spark Plugs
96130723
IFR6E111
Driver’s Side
96497155
—
Passenger’s Side
96619022
—
Rear
96301840
—
Part
Windshield Wiper Blade (Hook Type)
1
NGK
5-88
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
How This Section is Organized .........................6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6-4
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-4
Selecting the Right Schedule ...........................6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ..............6-7
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ......6-13
Part B: Owner Checks and Services ................6-18
At Each Fuel Fill ..........................................6-18
At Least Once a Month .................................6-18
At Least Twice a Year ...................................6-18
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-19
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .........6-22
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection ............................6-22
Exhaust System Inspection ............................6-22
Fuel System Inspection ..................................6-23
Engine Cooling System Inspection ...................6-23
Brake System Inspection ................................6-23
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....6-24
Part E: Maintenance Record ...........................6-26
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure
to follow scheduled maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase
the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect
our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your GM dealer’s service department do these jobs.
Your GM dealer has GM-trained and supported service
people that will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
have a qualified technician do the work. See
Doing Your Own Service Work on page 5-4.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service
department can perform for you.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help
keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,
or their equivalents, should be used whether you do
the work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to
record and keep track of the maintenance performed
on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts.
They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-14.
6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
In this part are scheduled maintenance services which
are to be performed at the mileage intervals specified.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. But we do not know exactly how you
will drive it. You may drive short distances only a few
times a week. Or you may drive long distances all the
time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle
in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do
errands or in many other ways.
Because of the different ways people use their vehicles,
maintenance needs may vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have questions
on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see
your dealer.
6-4
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when to schedule them.
When you go to your dealer for your service needs,
you will know that GM-trained and supported service
people will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the
vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these on the tire and loading
information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-29.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
Selecting the Right Schedule
Short Trip/City Intervals
First you will need to decide which of the two schedules
is right for your vehicle. Here is how to decide which
schedule to follow:
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Short Trip/City Definition
Follow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if any
one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is
particularly important when outside temperatures
are below freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling, such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic.
• If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police,
taxi or other commercial application.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if
you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions
is that these conditions cause engine oil to break
down sooner.
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Inspection. Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Replacement. Drive Belt(s) Inspection.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement. Spark Plug Replacement. Cooling
System Service. EVAP System Service. PCV System
Service. Timing Belt Inspection. Brake/Clutch Fluid
Change (or 24 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 42,000 Miles (70 000 km): Engine Oil Pan Drain
Plug Washer Replacement.
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Replacement. Timing Belt Replacement. EVAP System
Solenoid Valve Replacement.
Every 90,000 Miles (150 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement.
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
6-5
Long Trip/Highway Definition
Long Trip/Highway Intervals
Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of
the conditions from the Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance are true. Do not use this schedule if the
vehicle is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area
or used off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City
schedule for these conditions.
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Tire Rotation.
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under
highway conditions will cause engine oil to break
down slower.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Inspection. Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Replacement. Drive Belt(s) Inspection.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement. Spark Plug Replacement. Cooling
System Service. EVAP System Service. PCV System
Service. Timing Belt Inspection. Brake/Clutch Fluid
Change (or 24 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Replacement. Timing Belt Replacement. EVAP System
Solenoid Valve Replacement.
Every 90,000 Miles (150 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement. Engine Oil Pan Drain Plug Washer
Replacement.
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
6-6
Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle.
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-18
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-22.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
Footnotes
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-23.
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
6-7
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +)
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6-8
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
❑ Inspect timing belt.
❑ Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-22 for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean
radiator, condenser, pressure cap, and neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines, and EVAP vent
solenoid valve. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake/clutch fluid (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first).
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
42,000 Miles (70 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace engine oil pan drain plug washer.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
6-9
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace spark plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Replace timing belt.
❑ Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-22 for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean
radiator, condenser, pressure cap, and neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6-10
❑ Inspect EVAP canister and vapor lines. Replace
EVAP vent solenoid valve. An Emission Control
Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake/clutch fluid (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first).
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6-11
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Inspect timing belt.
❑ Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-22 for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean
radiator, condenser, pressure cap, and neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace engine oil pan drain plug washer.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
87,000 Miles (145 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6-12
❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines, and EVAP vent
solenoid valve. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake/clutch fluid (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first).
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled
Maintenance
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-18
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-22.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle.
Footnotes
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-23.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
6-13
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Inspect timing belt.
6-14
❑ Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-22 for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean
radiator, condenser, pressure cap, and neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines, and EVAP vent
solenoid valve. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake/clutch fluid (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first).
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
6-15
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may require
replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace spark plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Replace timing belt.
❑ Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service can
be complex; you should have your dealer perform this
service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-22 for what to
use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and neck. Pressure test the cooling
system and pressure cap. An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister and vapor lines. Replace EVAP
vent solenoid valve. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
6-16
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake/clutch fluid (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first).
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace engine oil pan drain plug washer.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belt(s).
❑ Inspect timing belt.
❑ Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-22 for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean
radiator, condenser, pressure cap, and neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines and EVAP vent
solenoid valve. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake/clutch fluid (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first).
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-17
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Listed in this part are owner checks and services
which should be performed at the intervals specified to
help ensure the safety, dependability and emission
control performance of your vehicle.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-32
for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-14 for further
details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add the proper
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-22 for further details.
6-18
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
check your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-47 for
further details.
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Hydraulic Clutch System Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace
blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that
streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see
Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 5-75.
Check the fluid level in the brake/clutch reservoir.
See Hydraulic Clutch on page 5-21. A fluid loss in this
system could indicate a problem. Have the system
inspected and repaired at once.
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-24.
Manual Transaxle Check
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level.
Check for leaks. A fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. Have the system inspected and repaired if needed.
Automatic Transaxle Check
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all hood latch assemblies, secondary latch,
pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, hood and body door
hinges, rear compartment and any folding seat hardware.
Part D tells you what to use. More frequent lubrication
may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment.
Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed.
See Automatic Transaxle Fluid on page 5-19.
A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the
system and repair if needed.
6-19
Starter Switch Check
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-26 if necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The starter should work only in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in
any other position, your vehicle needs service.
On manual transaxle vehicles, put the shift lever in
NEUTRAL, push the clutch down halfway and try to
start the engine. The starter should work only when
the clutch is pushed down all the way to the floor.
If the starter works when the clutch is not pushed all
the way down, your vehicle needs service.
6-20
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-26 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON, but do not
start the engine. Without applying the regular brake,
try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P) with
normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of
PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• With an automatic transaxle, the ignition should turn
to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
• With a manual transaxle, the ignition should turn to
LOCK only when you press the key release button.
On all vehicles, the key should come out only in LOCK.
Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.
It should only lock when turned to the right.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care
to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other
debris can collect.
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front of your
vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to
apply the regular brake at once should the
vehicle begin to move.
6-21
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Steering, Suspension and Front
Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department do these jobs. Make sure any
necessary repairs are completed at once.
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the
drive axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage.
Replace seals if necessary.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-14.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which
could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-30.
6-22
Fuel System Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings
for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including
drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to
have your brakes inspected more often if your driving
habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of
the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended
at least once a year.
6-23
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®
oil meets all the requirements for your
vehicle. To determine the proper
viscosity for your vehicle’s engine,
see Engine Oil on page 5-14.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water (preferably distilled) and good
quality Ethylene Glycol Base Coolant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378560,
Engine Coolant in Canada 993089) and conforming
to GM Specification 1825M or
recycled coolant conforming to
GM Specification 1825M.
See Engine Coolant on page 5-22.
6-24
Usage
Hydraulic
Brake System
Fluid/Lubricant
®
Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Washer Solvent
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Power Steering Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
System
on the label.
Automatic
Transaxle
Use only T-IV Automatic
Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 88900925,
in Canada 22689186). See
Automatic Transaxle Fluid on
page 5-19.
Manual
Transaxle
GM Goodwrench® Synthetic
Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346190,
in Canada 10953477) or equivalent
SAE 75W-85 GL-4 gear oil.
Usage
Key Lock
Cylinders
Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Chassis Lubricant
Manual
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
Transaxle Shift in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Linkage
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor,
and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and
Door Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
6-25
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, and who performed the service and
any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
6-26
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
6-27
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-28
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders ..........................................7-9
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-13
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..........................7-13
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ................................7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .........................................7-14
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-14
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-762-2737. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Pontiac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Pontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT (7668).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Pontiac, refer to the addresses below.
United States — Customer Assistance
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
www.Pontiac.com
1-800-762-2737 or
1-800-833-7668 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-4
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma #2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Roadside Assistance Program
As the owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Contact Pontiac’s
Roadside Assistance toll-free at 1-800-ROADSIDE
(762-3743). Roadside Assistance Representatives are
available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles (16 km).
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership
for warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance provided
when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
7-6
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Pontiac’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number.
• Telephone number of your location.
• Location of the vehicle.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of
the vehicle.
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle.
• Description of the problem.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you and
your family. Remember, we are only a phone call away.
Pontiac Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE
(762-3743), text telephone (TTY) users, call
1-888-889-2438.
Courtesy Transportation
Pontiac reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Pontiac’s
judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency
or type of occurrence.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
customers in conjunction with the Bumper-to-Bumper
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Several transportation options are available when
warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your
inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Pontiac reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for
new vehicles.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem
is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off
for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
7-7
Transportation Options
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum
amount per day and must be supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for
fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or
rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination
up to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement of public transportation expenses
may be available, for up to a maximum of five days.
In addition, should you arrange transportation through a
friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable fuel
expenses may be available, up to a five-day maximum.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
7-8
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle
as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,
but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called event
data recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to engine
speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle speed,
safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,
and the severity of a collision. This information has been
used to improve vehicle crash performance and may be
used to improve crash performance of future vehicles and
driving safety. Unlike the data recorders on many
airplanes, these on-board systems do not record sounds,
such as conversation of vehicle occupants.
7-9
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data collection.
7-10
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as
the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice
to assure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,
durability and safety are preserved. The use of
Genuine GM parts can help maintain your
GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used
for repair. These parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in prior accidents.
In most cases, the parts being recycled are
from undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM part, may be an
acceptable choice to maintain yourvehicle’s originally
designed appearance and safety performance, however,
the history of these parts is not known. Such parts
are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have a collision
repair center with GM-trained technicians and state
of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection
to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for
damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts.
Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at
the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
7-11
If an Accident Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Do not
leave the scene of an accident until all matters have
been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if its
position puts you in danger or you are instructed to
move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the accident.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the accident. This
will help guard against post-accident legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-6 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-12
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the accident. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy
of the report for a nominal fee. In some states with
“no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer or a private
collision repair facility to fix the damage, make sure
you are comfortable with them. Remember, you will
have to feel comfortable with their work for a
long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
Reporting Safety Defects
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
7-13
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Service Manuals
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-762-2737, or write:
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-14
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for
GM transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-15
✍ NOTES
7-16
A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3
Accessory Power Outlet(s) ............................... 3-16
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-68
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-5
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-80
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-17
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-18
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-26
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-32
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9
Airbag System ................................................ 1-56
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-68
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-62
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-64
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-68
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-62
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ........ 1-62
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-60
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-58
AM-FM Radio ................................................. 3-40
Antenna, Backglass ......................................... 3-73
Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-73
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-34
Appearance Care ............................................
Aluminum Wheels ........................................
Care of Safety Belts ....................................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................
Finish Care .................................................
Finish Damage ............................................
Glass Surfaces ............................................
Instrument Panel .........................................
Interior Plastic Components ...........................
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................
Tires ..........................................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................
Vinyl ..........................................................
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................
Ashtray(s) ......................................................
Audio System(s) .............................................
AM-FM Radio .............................................
Backglass Antenna ......................................
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
Care of Your CDs ........................................
Fixed Mast Antenna .....................................
Radio with CD ............................ 3-42, 3-46,
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
5-70
5-76
5-73
5-77
5-74
5-71
5-74
5-77
5-73
5-73
5-73
5-77
5-76
5-77
5-78
5-72
5-74
5-73
5-75
3-17
3-39
3-40
3-73
3-72
3-72
3-73
3-54
3-63
3-72
1
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid .......................................................... 5-19
Operation ................................................... 2-21
B
Backglass Antenna .......................................... 3-73
Battery .......................................................... 5-36
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-20
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-7
Emergencies ................................................ 4-8
Parking ...................................................... 2-26
System Inspection ....................................... 6-23
System Warning Light .................................. 3-27
Brakes .......................................................... 5-33
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-17
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-41
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ............. 5-43
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-41
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-41
Headlamps ................................................. 5-42
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-45
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-45
Turn Signal Lamps ...................................... 5-44
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-56
2
C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-5
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-3
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications ............................ 5-87
Carbon Monoxide ............. 2-9, 2-11, 2-30, 4-24, 4-35
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-73
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-72
Your CDs ................................................... 3-72
Center Rear Passenger Position, Safety Belts ..... 1-28
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-60
Charging System Light .................................... 3-33
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-35
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-77
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-35
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-32
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-42
Older Children ............................................. 1-29
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ................................... 1-49
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position .......................... 1-51
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-40
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-17
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-76
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-74
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-71
Finish Care ................................................. 5-74
Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-73
Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-73
Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-73
Tires .......................................................... 5-76
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-77
Vinyl .......................................................... 5-72
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-74
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-73
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-75
Climate Control System ................................... 3-18
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-22
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-21
Clock ............................................................ 3-32
Clutch, Hydraulic ............................................. 5-21
Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-10
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-69
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-6
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-28
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-20
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-24
Cooling System .............................................. 5-26
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-29
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-34
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ....... 7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .............................. 7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ......................... 7-13
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-14
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-14
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ............. 3-29
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-16
Door
Ajar Light ................................................... 3-39
Central Door Unlocking System ....................... 2-8
Door Ajar Reminder ....................................... 2-8
Locks .......................................................... 2-7
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-8
3
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-17
Seat Height Adjuster ...................................... 1-3
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-14
City ........................................................... 4-18
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-3
Freeway ..................................................... 4-19
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-22
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-16
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-28
Winter ........................................................ 4-24
F
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ......................................
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ...................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
Headlamp Wiring .........................................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block .........................
Power Windows and Other Power Options .........
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter .........................................
Battery .......................................................
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............
Coolant ......................................................
4
Engine (cont.)
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-20
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-28
Cooling System Inspection ............................ 6-23
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-30
Oil ............................................................. 5-14
Overheating ................................................ 5-24
Starting ...................................................... 2-19
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-9
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-28
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-13
5-80
5-83
5-81
5-80
5-81
5-80
5-80
5-17
5-36
3-35
5-22
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-17
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-77
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-73
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-61
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-62
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-69
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-19
Manual Transaxle ........................................ 5-21
Power Steering ........................................... 5-31
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-32
Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-39
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-15
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-5
California Fuel .............................................. 5-5
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-6
Gage ......................................................... 3-30
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-30
System Inspection ....................................... 6-23
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 5-83
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-81
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-81
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-80
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-28
Fuel .......................................................... 3-30
Speedometer .............................................. 3-25
Tachometer ................................................. 3-25
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-34
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-5
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-6
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-41
Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-80
Headlamps .................................................... 5-42
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-41
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-14
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ............. 5-43
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-41
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
On Reminder .............................................. 3-14
Turn Signal Lamps ...................................... 5-44
Heater ........................................................... 3-18
Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................... 1-3
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-29
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-21
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-22
Hold Mode Light ............................................. 3-34
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-10
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-17
Hydraulic Clutch ............................................. 5-21
5
I
L
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-18
Immobilizer .................................................... 2-16
Immobilizer Operation ...................................... 2-16
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-32
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-53
Inspection
Brake System ............................................. 6-23
Engine Cooling System ................................ 6-23
Exhaust System .......................................... 6-22
Fuel System ............................................... 6-23
Part C - Periodic Maintenance ....................... 6-22
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal ......................................... 6-22
Instrument Panel
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness .................................................. 3-15
Cluster ....................................................... 3-24
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 5-48
Lamps
Dome ........................................................ 3-16
Exterior ...................................................... 3-13
Fog ........................................................... 3-15
LATCH System
Child Restraints ........................................... 1-42
Liftgate .......................................................... 2-11
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-32
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-34
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-27
Charging System ......................................... 3-33
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-29
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator .................. 3-29
Door Ajar ................................................... 3-39
Fog Lamp .................................................. 3-39
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-29
Hold Mode ................................................. 3-34
Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-30
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-35
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-38
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-26
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-32
Safety Belt Reminder Tone ........................... 3-25
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-29
Lockout Protection ............................................ 2-9
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-37
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4
Keys ............................................................... 2-2
6
Locks
Central Door Unlocking System ....................... 2-8
Door ........................................................... 2-7
Lockout Protection ......................................... 2-9
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-8
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ........ 6-13
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-13
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-30
M
Maintenance, Normal Replacement Parts ............ 5-88
Maintenance Schedule
At Each Fuel Fill ......................................... 6-18
At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-18
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-19
At Least Twice a Year .................................. 6-18
Brake System Inspection .............................. 6-23
Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-23
Exhaust System Inspection ........................... 6-22
Fuel System Inspection ................................ 6-23
How This Section is Organized ....................... 6-3
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ....... 6-13
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............. 6-18
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 6-22
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Part D - Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants ............................................... 6-24
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................ 6-26
Selecting the Right Schedule .......................... 6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ............. 6-7
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection .......................... 6-22
Using .......................................................... 6-4
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-35
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2
Manual Transaxle
Fluid .......................................................... 5-21
Operation ................................................... 2-24
Manual Windows ............................................ 2-12
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-32
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-33
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-33
Outside Manual Mirrors ................................ 2-32
Outside Power Mirror ................................... 2-33
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
N
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-17
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 5-88
7
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-25
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-25
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-11
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-14
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-38
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-29
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-21
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-33
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-33
Manual Mirrors ............................................ 2-32
Power Mirror ............................................... 2-33
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ............... 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ................... 6-18
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ............ 6-22
Part D - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 6-24
Part E - Maintenance Record ............................. 6-26
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-26
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-22
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-64
Passing ......................................................... 4-12
Power
Accessory Outlet(s) ...................................... 3-16
Electrical System ......................................... 5-80
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-31
Windows .................................................... 2-13
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-28
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-16
P
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................
Shifting Out of ............................................
Parking
Brake ........................................................
Over Things That Burn .................................
Parking Your Vehicle .......................................
8
2-27
2-28
2-26
2-30
2-29
R
Radios ..........................................................
AM-FM Radio .............................................
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
Care of Your CDs ........................................
Radio with CD ............................ 3-42, 3-46,
3-39
3-40
3-72
3-72
3-54
Radios (cont.)
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-63
Understanding Reception .............................. 3-72
Rear Door Security Locks .................................. 2-8
Rear Seat Operation ................................... 1-7, 1-9
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-24
Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper ......................... 3-10
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-32
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-3
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-33
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-5
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-65
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-63
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-45
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-14
General Motors ........................................... 7-14
United States Government ............................ 7-13
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-69
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-70
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-24
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-28
Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-31
S
Safety Belt
Pretensioners .............................................. 1-28
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-32
Reminder Tone ............................................ 3-25
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 5-73
Center Rear Passenger Position .................... 1-28
Driver Position ............................................ 1-17
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-17
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ........ 1-16
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-24
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-24
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-28
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-24
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-12
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 1-23
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Seats
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ............................. 1-3
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-6
Manual ........................................................ 1-2
Rear Seat Operation ............................... 1-7, 1-9
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-3
Secondary Information Center (SIC) ................... 3-31
Securing a Child Restraint
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-49
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-51
9
Selecting the Right Schedule, Maintenance .......... 6-5
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-4
California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-3
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-35
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-14
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-68
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-77
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-27
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-28
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ................ 6-7
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-23
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7
Spare Tire
Compact .................................................... 5-69
Installing .................................................... 5-65
Removing ................................................... 5-63
Storing ....................................................... 5-69
Specifications, Capacities ................................. 5-87
Speedometer .................................................. 3-25
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-19
Steering .......................................................... 4-9
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection .............................. 6-22
10
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
Storage Areas ................................................ 2-34
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-34
Glove Box .................................................. 2-34
Sunglasses Storage Compartment .................. 2-35
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-28
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-13
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-35
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-25
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ...... 5-45
Theft-Deterrent System .................................... 2-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-14
Immobilizer ................................................. 2-16
Immobilizer Operation ................................... 2-16
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Tires ............................................................. 5-47
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .......................... 5-76
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-56
Chains ....................................................... 5-60
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-62
Cleaning .................................................... 5-76
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-69
Different Size .............................................. 5-57
Tires (cont.)
If a Tire Goes Flat .......................................
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................
Inspection and Rotation ................................
Installing the Spare Tire ................................
Removing the Flat Tire .................................
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ...............
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............
Tire Sidewall Labeling ..................................
Tire Terminology and Definitions ....................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .........................
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance .................
Wheel Replacement .....................................
When It Is Time for New Tires ......................
Towing
Recreational Vehicle .....................................
Towing a Trailer ..........................................
Your Vehicle ...............................................
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic ...........................................
Fluid, Manual ..............................................
Transaxle Operation, Automatic .........................
Transaxle Operation, Manual ............................
Trip Odometer ................................................
5-61
5-53
5-54
5-65
5-65
5-63
5-69
5-48
5-50
5-58
5-59
5-59
5-56
4-33
4-35
4-33
5-19
5-21
2-21
2-24
3-25
Trunk .............................................................. 2-9
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
U
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-72
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-58
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-6
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-29
Parking Your ............................................... 2-29
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders .................................................... 7-9
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-79
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-79
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-21
Visors ........................................................... 2-13
11
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-23
Warnings
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-59
Different Size .............................................. 5-57
Replacement ............................................... 5-59
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-40
Windows ....................................................... 2-12
Manual ...................................................... 2-12
Power ........................................................ 2-13
12
Windshield
Washer ........................................................ 3-9
Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-32
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-46
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-75
Wiper Fuses ............................................... 5-80
Wipers ......................................................... 3-8
Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ........................ 3-10
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-24
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement